äcaution - produktinfo.conrad.com

Transcription

HP Notebook Hard Drive
Measures of care, diagnosis and maintenance
Introduction......................................................................................................................................... 2
HP Notebook LidSwitch Policy............................................................................................................... 3
Notebook F10 Setup Hard Drive Self-Test ............................................................................................... 3
Minimum System BIOS Required............................................................................................................ 4
Hard Drive Mounting Screw.................................................................................................................. 4
HP Recommendations for Notebook Users .............................................................................................. 5
Hard Drive Troubleshooting Flowchart.................................................................................................... 6
Introduction
HP has a passion to continuously improve upon the customer experience. This white paper explains
the measures that HP is providing to its customers to reduce the risk of hard drive failure. These
measures include a new power management policy, an enhanced hard drive self-test, and
recommendations for maintaining software integrity.
The hard drive in the notebook is in some respects a very fragile device. In each new generation
of hard drives, the manufacturers have made significant improvements to the drive’s susceptibility to
shock events. However, if the drive is exposed to shock events beyond the set specifications, the hard
drive can fail.
Shock events can cause read/write head misalignment, or contact between the read/write heads and
the media, resulting in symptoms such as a clicking noise, the failure to complete servo, and/or an
inaccessible boot device. Typically, such symptoms result from a significant bump or drop that occurs
• While the notebook is turned off (non-operational shock).
- or • While the unit is turned on and the hard drive is reading or writing data (operational shock).
Shock events may cause any of the following errors to be displayed:
Non-system disk
No boot device
1720 and/or 1782 errors
Hard drive performance can also be degraded if file fragmentation is not reduced by regular
software maintenance. Over time, the hard drive file structure can become fragmented due to
continuous creating, editing, copying, and deleting of files. New data is written to the hard drive on a
“first available space” basis. Fragmentation occurs when all of a given application or file is not stored
contiguously on the hard drive. When a file is fragmented, the hard drive throughput performance is
impacted because the hard drive reading/writing heads have to seek the data from multiple locations
across the hard drive.
Other types of hard drive performance issues that mimic hard drive failure are due to software
problems. Such software problems include but are not limited to viruses, application and/or operating
system bugs, and/or file corruption. The most difficult to trace of them all is file corruption, because of
how easily it can occur. For instance, powering off the notebook before the operating system shuts
down can create corrupted boot files, resulting in symptoms such as blue screens and continuous
reboots.
HP addresses these issues with the following measures.
2
HP Notebook LidSwitch Policy
The opportunity for operational shock is at its greatest when an end user is mobile with his or her
notebook. Therefore HP has released a utility, the HP Notebook LidSwitch Policy, that works in
conjunction with the Microsoft Windows API for power management. This enhancement allows the
notebook to go into Standby mode when the display lid is closed while the notebook is operating
from the internal battery pack, e.g., on DC power, away from a docking device or external power
supply running on AC power. HP recommends use of this SoftPaq on all currently shipping notebooks.
The HP Notebook LidSwitch Policy is available from the following URL:
http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/support.html
After installing the application, access the HP Notebook LidSwitch Policy by selecting Start >
Programs > HP Notebook LidSwitch Policy. The following options are displayed:
• Display status
• Enable HP Notebook LidSwitch Policy
Note 1: The HP Notebook LidSwitch Policy utility will not invoke Standby on an AC-powered
notebook having the display lid closed that subsequently transitions to DC power. The notebook must
first be undocked or removed from AC power before the display lid is closed.
Note 2: The Microsoft Windows 2000 and Windows XP operating systems provide a feature called
Lid Switch Standby. However, it operates whether the notebook is operating on AC power or on DC
power. Since the purpose of docking is to allow the user to connect to AC power, close the notebook
display, and use an external keyboard and monitor, activating Standby upon lid closure in this
scenario is not an acceptable option.
Notebook F10 Setup Hard Drive Self-Test
HP has enhanced the Hard Drive Self-Test routine which is accessible via the notebook’s F10 Setup
Tools menu. The new routine of the hard drive self-test increases its ability to detect a fault and fail the
hard drive. The short and long versions of the hard drive self-test have been combined as one test
option. Initiating the enhanced hard drive self-test includes the following:
1. The short test runs. If no errors occur, the long test automatically runs.
2. If no errors occur, SMART attribute checking automatically runs.
3. If a failure is detected in either of the tests, the process halts and failure occurs.
Note: Either test may be aborted at any time by pressing the esc key.
The F10 Setup Hard Drive Self-Test enhancement is available as a commercial notebook system
BIOS upgrade. Please visit the HP Web site at http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/support.html
to download the latest BIOS update. HP recommends the latest system BIOS upgrade be applied to all
currently shipping notebooks, in addition to the Evo N400 and Evo N600 series. Refer to the
following table for the absolute minimum system BIOS required by each platform.
3
Minimum System BIOS Required
Notebook Platform
BIOS Version
BIOS Date
HP Compaq Business nc8000
F.0A
12 Dec 03
HP Compaq Business nw8000
F.0A
12 Dec 03
HP Compaq Business nc6000
F.09
09 Feb 04
HP Compaq Business nc4000 Series
F.25
06 Feb 04
HP Compaq Business nx9000 Series
KG.M1.15
19 Dec 03
HP Compaq Business nx5000
F.05
04 Feb 04
Compaq Evo N620c
F.0E
21 Nov 03
Compaq Evo N610c/v
F.18
09 Dec 03
Compaq Evo N600c
686DF
31 Dec 03
Compaq Evo N800c
F.14
08 Mar 04
Compaq Evo N410c
F.14
15 Dec 03
Compaq Evo N400c
686AW_2004.03.8A
08 Mar 04
Hard Drive Mounting Screw
All HP and Compaq branded commercial and SMB notebooks come equipped with one or more hard
drive mounting screws, which are designed to reliably support the installed hard drive. Therefore,
these screws must be correctly installed at all times. Without the hard drive mounting screws, the
chance of hard drive failure over time is greatly increased. Because the screws are an integral part of
the design of the notebook, they should always be replaced after they are removed or when they are
missing from the notebook altogether.
Hard drive mounting screw kit—Whenever one of the following commercial notebooks is
serviced and one or more of the hard drive mounting screws are missing, they can be replaced from
one of the following bulk screw kits (100 screws per kit):
• For N600c/N610c/N620c/Nc6000 models, use bulk HDD spare kit part number 360670-001.
• For N800c/N800v/N800w models use bulk HDD spare kit part number 360380-001.
• For HP Pavilion ze4300/ze4400/ze4500/ze5300/ze5400/ze5500 and HP Compaq nx9000/
nx9005/nx9010 models, use bulk HDD spare kit part number 361188-001.
Note: Customers should contact their local service partner to obtain the hard drive mounting screws.
4
HP Recommendations for Notebook Users
• Install HP Notebook LidSwitch Policy, or as an alternative, place the notebook into Standby mode
before transporting it from one location to another.
• Upgrade to the latest system BIOS, as given in the “F10 Setup Hard Drive Self-Test” section.
• Whenever possible, adjust power management settings (power schemes) in Control Panel to permit
the hard drive to be turned off when it will be unused for an extended period of time, e.g., when
you are working in applications such as a word processor that executes primarily from electronic
memory without having to access the hard drive very often.
• Perform the Defrag operation periodically to optimize the reading and writing of data to the hard
drive. During Defrag, data is moved to contiguous space. As a result, movement of the hard drive
reading/writing heads is decreased. Please refer to the following Microsoft Knowledge Base
articles for information on how to defragment your hard drive:
– Windows XP: http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;EN-US;314848
– Windows XP command line: http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;EN-US;283080
– Windows 2000: http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;EN-US;227463
• Periodically use the Microsoft Recovery Console to run, at a minimum, the chkdsk /p /r commands
to check your hard drive for any errors, bad sectors and/or recovery of readable information.
Please refer to the following Microsoft Knowledge Base articles for information:
– Windows XP: http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;en-us;314058&Product=winxp
– Windows 2000: http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;EN-US;229716
• Install and maintain a virus protection program to prevent failures due to viruses.
• Regularly back up critical email and documents to removable media.
• Regularly check the HP Web site for system BIOS and driver enhancements.
5
Hard Drive Troubleshooting Flowchart
6
© Copyright 2004 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only
warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty
statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should
be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for
technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.
5982-4726ENUC, 05/2004
7
Hardware and Software
Guide
HP Notebook Series
Document Part Number: 375802-001
December 2004
This guide explains how to identify, access, and use the hardware
and software features available on your notebook.
Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. Bluetooth is a
trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company
under license. Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The
only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express
warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing
herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall
not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.
Hardware and Software Guide
HP Notebook Series
First Edition December 2004
Reference Number: ze2000
Contents
1 Hardware
Top Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
TouchPad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
Power Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
Wireless and Volume Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7
Antennae . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
Front Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9
Speakers, Jacks and Display Release Button. . . . . . 1–11
Rear Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12
Left-Side Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13
Ports and Jacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13
PC Card Slot and Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–14
Right-Side Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15
Bottom Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17
Mini PCI and Memory Compartments . . . . . . . . . . 1–17
Bays, Battery Latch and Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–18
Additional Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19
Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19
Optical Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–20
Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–21
iii
Contents
2 TouchPad and Keyboard
TouchPad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
Identifying TouchPad Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
Using the TouchPad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
Setting TouchPad Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
Hotkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
Identifying Hotkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
Hotkey Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
Using Hotkey Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
Using Hotkey Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
Keypads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
Using the Embedded Numeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
Using an External Numeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
3 Power
Power Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
Selecting a Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
Switching Between Battery and External Power. . . . 3–3
Power Control and Light Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
Standby, Hibernation and Shutdown Overviews . . . . . . . 3–5
Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
Hibernation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
Leaving Your Work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
Interference with Drive Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
Standby, Hibernation and Shutdown Procedures. . . . . . . 3–8
Turning the Notebook On or Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
Initiating or Resuming from Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
Initiating or Restoring from Hibernation. . . . . . . . . 3–10
Using Emergency Shutdown Procedures . . . . . . . . 3–11
Power Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12
Using Power Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12
Setting a Standby Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12
Setting Other Power Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12
iv
Contents
Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Charging a Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring the Charge in a Battery Pack . . . . . . . .
Managing Low-Battery Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating a Battery Pack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conserving Battery Pack Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing a Battery Pack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing a Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposing of a Used Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–14
3–14
3–15
3–17
3–19
3–23
3–25
3–27
3–27
4 Multimedia
Internal Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
Volume Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
External Audio Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
Using the Audio-Out (Headphone) Jack . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
Using the Audio-In (Microphone) Jack. . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
External Video Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
Connecting an S-Video Device (Select
Models Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
Displaying a Video Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
CD and DVD Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8
Inserting or Removing a Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8
Using Media Activity Hotkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
Setting AutoPlay Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
Protecting Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11
Protecting a CD or DVD Write Process . . . . . . . . . 4–12
Observing the Copyright Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
Changing DVD Region Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
Multimedia Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
Multimedia Software Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
Selecting Multimedia Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16
Installing WinDVD Creator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–17
v
Contents
5 Wireless (Select Models Only)
Wireless Local Area Network (Select Models Only) . . . 5–2
Setting Up a WLAN in Your Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
Using a WLAN Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
Using Wireless Security Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
Installing Wireless Software (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
Troubleshooting Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
Bluetooth (Select Models Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–9
Device Power States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11
Turning On the Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13
Turning Off and Disabling the Devices. . . . . . . . . . 5–14
6 Security
Security Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
Security Preferences in the Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
QuickLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
Passwords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
HP and Windows Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
HP and Windows Password Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . 6–6
HP Administrator Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–8
Setting HP Administrator Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–8
Entering HP Administrator Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . 6–9
Power-On Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–10
Setting Power-On Passwords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–10
Entering Power-On Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–11
Device Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–12
Antivirus Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–13
Critical Security Updates for Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . 6–14
Firewall Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–15
Optional Security Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–16
vi
Contents
7 Hardware Upgrades and Replacements
Device Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
Connecting Any Powered Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
Connecting a USB Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2
Connecting a 1394 Device (Select Models Only) . . . 7–3
Connecting a Communication Device. . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
Digital Memory Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
Using the 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader Light . . . . . . 7–6
Inserting a Digital Memory Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
Removing a Digital Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
PC Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–9
Inserting a PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10
Stopping or Removing a PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
Adding a Drive to the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
Using the IDE Drive Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
Caring for Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
Replacing the Internal Hard Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
Increasing Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
Removing or Inserting a Memory Module . . . . . . . 7–20
8 Software Updates and Recoveries and
System Software
Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing for a Software Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Downloading and Installing an Update . . . . . . . . . . .
Software Recoveries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using System Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repairing or Reinstalling Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Launch Buttons Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessing the Quick Launch Buttons Control
Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8–1
8–2
8–3
8–7
8–7
8–8
8–9
8–9
vii
Contents
Displaying Hotkey Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Button Assignments on an External
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Language of the Setup Utility . . . . . .
Navigating and Selecting in the Setup Utility . . . . .
Displaying System Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restoring Default Settings in the Setup Utility . . . .
Using Advanced Setup Utility Features . . . . . . . . .
Closing the Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8–12
8–13
8–14
8–14
8–15
8–15
8–16
8–17
8–18
8–19
A Specifications
Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–1
Rated Input Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–2
Expansion Port Input/Output Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–3
Index
viii
1
Hardware
Top Components
Keys
Component
Description
1
Function keys (12)
Perform system and application tasks.
When combined with fn, the function
keys perform additional tasks as
hotkeys.
2
Windows logo key
Displays the Microsoft® Windows®
Start menu.
(Continued)
1–1
Hardware
1–2
Component
Description
3
fn key
Combines with other keys to perform
system tasks. For example, pressing
fn+f7 decreases screen brightness.
4
Keypad keys (15)
Can be used like the keys on an
external numeric keypad.
5
Windows applications key
Displays a shortcut menu for items
beneath the pointer.
Hardware
TouchPad
Component
Description
1
TouchPad*
Moves the pointer.
2
Left TouchPad button*
Functions like the left button on an
external mouse.
3
Right TouchPad button*
Functions like the right button on an
external mouse.
4
TouchPad vertical scrolling
region*
Scrolls upward or downward.
*This table describes default settings. For information about changing the
functions of TouchPad components, see the “Setting TouchPad
Preferences” section in Chapter 2, “TouchPad and Keyboard.”
1–3
Hardware
Power Controls
Component
Description
1
Display switch*
If the notebook is closed while on, initiates
standby.
2
Power/standby button*
When the notebook is
■ Off, press to turn on the notebook.
■ On, briefly press to initiate hibernation.
■ In standby, briefly press to resume from
standby.
■ In hibernation, briefly press to restore
from hibernation.
system has stopped responding
✎ IfandtheWindows
shutdown procedures
cannot be used, press and hold for at
least 4 seconds to turn off the
notebook.
*This table describes default settings. For information about changing the
function of the display switch or power/standby button, see the “Setting
Other Power Preferences” section in Chapter 3, “Power.”
1–4
Hardware
Lights
Component
Description
1 Caps lock light
2 Power/standby
On: Caps lock is on.
light‡
3 Mute light
On: Notebook is turned on.
Blinking: Notebook is in standby.
Off: Notebook is off.
On: Volume is muted.
(Continued)
1–5
Hardware
Component
Description
4 Wireless light (available on
On: One or more optional internal
wireless devices, such as a WLAN
and/or a Bluetooth® device (select
models only), are turned on.†
select models)*
5 Num lock light
On: Num lock or the embedded
numeric keypad is on.
*The wireless lights (on the wireless button and on the front of the
notebook) display the same information. The wireless light on the wireless
button is visible only when the notebook is open; the wireless light on the
front of the notebook is visible when the notebook is closed.
†
For information about establishing a wireless link, visit
http://www.hp.com/go/wireless.
‡
The power/standby light associated with the power/standby button and the
power/standby light on the front of the notebook display the same
information. The power/standby light associated with the power/standby
button is visible only when the notebook is open; the power/standby light on
the front of the notebook is visible when the notebook is closed.
1–6
Hardware
Wireless and Volume Buttons
Component
Description
1
Volume down button
Decreases system volume.
2
Volume mute button
Mutes or restores volume.
3
Volume up button
Increases system volume.
4
Wireless button (available on
select models)
Turns the wireless functionality on or
off but does not create a wireless
connection.
establish a wireless
✎ To
connection, a wireless network
must already be set up. For
information about establishing
a wireless link, visit
1–7
Hardware
Antennae
Component
Description
Antennae (2)*
Send and receive wireless device signals.
Å
Exposure to Radio Frequency
Radiation. The radiated output
power of this device is below the
FCC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the device should be
used in such a manner that the
potential for human contact during
normal operation is minimized. To
avoid the possibility of exceeding
the FCC radio frequency exposure
limits, human proximity to the
antennae should be not less than
20 cm (8 inches) during normal
operation, including when the
notebook display is closed.
*The antennae are available on select models. The antennae are not
visible from the outside of the notebook. For optimal transmission, keep
the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions.
1–8
Hardware
Front Components
Lights
Component
Description
1
Wireless light* (available on
select models)
On: One or more optional internal
wireless devices, such as a WLAN
and/or a Bluetooth device (select
models only), are turned on.†
2
Power/standby light‡
On: Notebook is turned on.
Blinking: Notebook is in standby.
Off: Notebook is off.
(Continued)
1–9
Hardware
Component
Description
3
IDE (Integrated Drive
Electronics) drive light
On or blinking: The internal hard drive
or an optical drive is being accessed.
4
Battery light
On: The battery pack is charging.
Blinking: The battery pack has
reached a low-battery condition.
Off: The battery pack is fully charged
or not inserted.
*The wireless lights display the same information. The wireless light on the
front of the notebook is visible when the notebook is closed; the wireless
light on the wireless button is visible only when the notebook is open.
†
For information about establishing a wireless link, visit
‡
The power/standby light associated with the power/standby button and
the power/standby light on the front of the notebook display the same
information. The power/standby light associated with the power/standby
button is visible when the notebook is open; the power/standby light on the
front of the notebook is visible only when the notebook is closed.
1–10
Hardware
Speakers, Jacks and Display Release Button
Component
Description
1
Stereo speakers (2)
Produce stereo sound.
2
Display release button
Opens the notebook.
3
Audio-in
(microphone) jack
Connects an optional monaural (single
sound channel) microphone.
4
Audio-out
(headphone) jack
Connects optional headphones or
powered stereo speakers. Also connects
the audio function of an audio/video
device such as a television or VCR.
1–11
Hardware
Rear Components
Component
Description
Exhaust vent*
Provides airflow to cool internal
components.
Ä
To prevent overheating, do not
obstruct vents. Do not allow a
hard surface, such as a printer,
or a soft surface, such as pillows
or thick rugs or clothing, to block
airflow.
*The notebook has 4 vents. This and all other vents are visible on the
bottom of the notebook. One vent is also visible on the left side of
the notebook.
1–12
Hardware
Left-Side Components
Ports and Jacks
Component
Description
1
Power connector
Connects the AC adapter cable.
2
Monitor port
Connects an optional VGA monitor or
projector.
3
Expansion port (available
on select models)*
Connects the notebook to an optional
Expansion Base.
4
RJ-45 (network) jack
Connects an optional network cable.
5
RJ-11 (modem) jack
Connects the modem cable.
6
USB
port†
Connects an optional USB device.
*For expansion port signal information, see the “Expansion Port
Input/Output Signals” section in “Appendix A.”
†Depending on the model, the notebook has 2 or 3 USB ports. The other
USB ports are on the right side of the notebook.
1–13
Hardware
PC Card Slot and Button
Component
Description
1
PC Card slot
Supports an optional Type I or Type II
32-bit (CardBus) or 16-bit PC Card.
2
PC Card eject button
Ejects an optional PC Card from the
PC Card slot.
1–14
Hardware
Right-Side Components
Component
Description
1 USB ports (1 or 2
Connect optional USB devices.
depending on the notebook
model)*
2 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader Supports an optional digital memory
slot (available on select
models)
3 1394 port (select models
only)
card.†
Connects an optional 1394a device
such as a scanner, a digital camera,
or a digital camcorder.
4 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader On: An optional digital memory card is
light (available on select
models)
5 Optical drive‡
being accessed.
Supports an optical disc.
(Continued)
1–15
Hardware
Component
Description
6 S-Video–out jack (available Connects an optional S-Video device
on select models)
7 Security cable slot
such as a television, VCR, camcorder,
projector, or video capture card.
Attaches an optional security cable to
the notebook.
Ä
Security solutions are designed
to act as deterrents. These
deterrents may not prevent a
product from being mishandled
or stolen.
*Depending on the model, the notebook has 2 or 3 USB ports. The other
USB port is on the left side.
†The digital memory card could be a Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card,
Memory Stick, Memory Stick Pro, xD-Picture Card, MultiMediaCard, or
SmartMedia (SM) card.
‡The type of optical drive—for example, a DVD-ROM drive, a DVD/CD-RW
Combo Drive, or a DVD+R/RW and CD-RW Combo Drive—varies by
notebook model.
1–16
Hardware
Bottom Components
Mini PCI and Memory Compartments
Component
Description
1 Mini PCI
Holds an optional wireless LAN device.
compartment
2 Memory
compartment
Ä
To prevent an unresponsive system and
the display of a warning message,
install only a Mini PCI device authorized
for use in your notebook by the
governmental agency that regulates
wireless devices in your country. If you
install an unauthorized device and then
receive a warning message, remove the
device to restore notebook functionality.
Then contact Customer Care.
Contains 2 memory slots that support
replaceable memory modules. The number of
preinstalled memory modules varies by
notebook model.
1–17
Hardware
Bays, Battery Latch and Vents
Component
Description
1 Battery bay
Holds a battery pack.
2 Battery pack release latch
Releases a battery pack from the
battery bay.*
3 Exhaust vents (4)†
Provide airflow to cool internal
components.
Ä
4 Hard drive bay
obstruct vents. Do not allow a hard
surface, such as a printer, or a soft
surface, such as pillows or thick
rugs or clothing, to block airflow.
Holds the internal hard drive.
*Battery packs vary by model.
†The notebook has 4 vents. One vent is also visible on the rear of the
notebook.
1–18
Hardware
Additional Components
Hardware
The components included with your notebook vary by region,
country, notebook model, and the optional hardware you
purchased. The following sections identify the standard external
components included with most notebook models.
Component
Description
1
Battery pack*
Powers the notebook when the notebook
is not connected to external power.
2
AC adapter
Converts AC power to DC power.
3
Power cord*
Connects an AC adapter to an AC outlet.
4
Modem cable*
Connects a modem to an
RJ-11 telephone jack or to a
country-specific modem adapter.
5
Country-specific modem
adapter (included by
region as required)*
Adapts the modem cable to a non–RJ-11
(modem) jack.
*Battery packs vary by model. Power cords, modem cables, and modem
adapters vary in appearance by region and country.
1–19
Hardware
Optical Discs
Software on optical discs, such as CDs or DVDs, is included
with all notebook models.
■
The software applications packaged in the Required for Setup
bag are not preinstalled on your notebook. Depending on
how you want to use your notebook, you might want to install
some or all of these applications.
■
The software applications packaged in the Save for Later bag
are preinstalled or preloaded on your notebook. The software
discs are provided in case you ever need to repair or reinstall
this software.
❏ Additional discs packaged with your notebook provide
operating system recovery software and driver recovery
software. Application recovery software is provided with
select notebook models.
❏ The Notebook Documentation CD contains Adobe®
Acrobat® PDF files, not software. The files on the
Notebook Documentation CD are not preinstalled or
preloaded on your notebook.
1–20
Hardware
Labels
The labels affixed to the notebook provide information you might
need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel
internationally with the notebook.
■
Service Tag—Provides the product name, product number
(P/N), and serial number (S/N) of your notebook. You might
need the product number and the serial number when you
contact Customer Care. The Service Tag label is affixed to
the bottom of the notebook. To display the information on the
Service Tag on your screen, select Start > Help and
Support.
■
Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity—Contains the
Microsoft® Windows® Product Key. You might need the
Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system.
This certificate is affixed to the bottom of the notebook.
■
Regulatory label—Provides regulatory information about the
notebook. The Regulatory label is affixed to the inside of
the battery bay.
■
Modem Approval label—Provides regulatory information
about the modem and lists the agency approval markings
required by some of the countries in which the modem has
been approved for use. You might need this information when
traveling internationally. The Modem Approval label is
affixed to the inside of the memory compartment cover.
■
Wireless certification labels—Some notebook models include
an optional WLAN device and/or an optional Bluetooth®
device. If your notebook model includes one or more wireless
devices, a certificate providing regulatory information about
each device and the approval markings of some of the
countries in which the device has been approved for use is
included with your notebook. You might need this
information when traveling internationally. Wireless
certification labels are affixed to the inside of the Mini PCI
compartment cover.
1–21
2
TouchPad and Keyboard
TouchPad
Identifying TouchPad Components
The TouchPad includes the following components:
1 TouchPad
3 Right TouchPad button
2 Left TouchPad button
4 TouchPad vertical scrolling region
2–1
Using the TouchPad
The TouchPad provides the navigation, selection, and scroll
functions of an optional external mouse:
■
To move the pointer, slide your finger across the TouchPad
surface in the direction you want to move the pointer.
■
To execute the click functions of the left or right button on an
external mouse, press the left or right TouchPad button.
■
To scroll, place your finger onto a scrolling region, and then
slide your finger along the scrolling region in the direction
you want to scroll. (Sliding your finger from the TouchPad to
a scrolling region without first lifting your finger from the
TouchPad and then placing it on the scrolling region will not
activate the scrolling region.)
The TouchPad is enabled when the notebook is turned on. If you
work with keystrokes rather than mouse actions, you might prefer
to disable the TouchPad to prevent accidental TouchPad activity.
2–2
Setting TouchPad Preferences
In the Windows Mouse Properties window you can
■
Adjust basic pointing device settings such as click speed,
pointer speed and shape, and mouse trails.
■
Configure the right and left TouchPad buttons for
right-handed or left-handed use. These buttons are set by
default for right-handed use.
To access the Mouse Properties window, select Start > Control
Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Mouse.
Windows instructions in your notebook documentation
✎ All
describe Microsoft Windows XP procedures based on the default
Windows XP category view. For information about switching
between Windows XP classic view and Windows XP category
view, select Start > Help and Support > Customizing your
computer > Files, folders, and programs > Use Windows
classic folders.
In the TouchPad Properties window you can access additional
TouchPad preferences.
»
To access the TouchPad Properties window, use the
TouchPad to select Start > Control Panel > Printers and
Other Hardware > Mouse > Device Settings, and then
select the Settings button. (If you follow this path using an
optional external mouse, the TouchPad Properties window
might be unavailable.)
2–3
Among the preferences available in the TouchPad Properties
window are
■
TouchPad Tapping, which enables you to tap the TouchPad
once to select an item or twice to double-click an item.
To access TouchPad Tapping settings, select Tapping.
■
Edge Motion, which sets the TouchPad to continue cursor
movement when your finger reaches the edge of the
TouchPad.
To access Edge Motion settings, select Pointer Motion.
■
Long Distance Scrolling, which sets the scrolling region to
continue scrolling when your finger reaches the end of the
scrolling region.
To access Long Distance Scrolling, select Virtual Scrolling.
■
PalmCheck, which helps keep the TouchPad from being
accidentally activated while you are using the keyboard.
To access PalmCheck, select Sensitivity.
2–4
Hotkeys
Identifying Hotkeys
Hotkeys are preset combinations of the esc key 1, the fn key 2,
and one of the function keys 3.
The icons on the f1 through f12 keys represent hotkey functions.
Hotkey functions and procedures are described in the following
sections.
2–5
Hotkey Quick Reference
The following table identifies the default hotkey functions. The
function of the fn+f5 hotkey can be changed. For instructions,
see the “Setting Other Power Preferences” section in Chapter 3,
“Power.”
Default Function
Hotkey
Opens Help and Support Center.
fn+f1
Opens print options window.
fn+f2
Opens default Internet browser.
fn+f3
Switches the image among displays.
fn+f4
Initiates standby.
fn+f5
Initiates QuickLock.
fn+f6
Decreases screen brightness.
fn+f7
Increases screen brightness.
fn+f8
Plays, pauses, or resumes an audio CD or DVD.
fn+f9
Stops an audio CD or DVD.
fn+f10
Plays the previous track or chapter on an audio CD or DVD. fn+f11
Plays the next track or chapter on an audio CD or DVD.
fn+f12
Displays system information.*
fn+esc
*To clear the system information display, press esc.
2–6
Using Hotkey Procedures
Using Hotkeys On the Internal Keyboard
To use a hotkey command on the notebook keyboard, use either
of the following procedures:
■
Briefly press fn, and then briefly press the second key
of the hotkey command.
■
Press and hold down fn, briefly press the second key of
the hotkey command, and then release both keys at the
same time.
Using Hotkeys on an External Keyboard
To use a hotkey command on an external keyboard, press the
scroll lock key twice, then the second key only of the hotkey
combination. For example, to use the fn+f5 command on an
external keyboard, press scroll lock+scroll lock+f5.
Using Hotkey Commands
Open Help and Support Center (fn+f1)
The fn+f1 hotkey opens the Help and Support Center.
In addition to providing information about your operating system,
the Help and Support Center provides
■
Information about your notebook, such as model and serial
number, installed software, hardware components, and
specifications.
■
Answers to questions about using your notebook.
■
Tutorials to help you learn to use notebook and operating
system features.
■
Updates for your operating system, drivers, and the software
provided on your notebook.
2–7
■
Checkups for notebook functionality.
■
Automated and interactive troubleshooting, repair solutions,
and system recovery procedures.
■
Links to Customer Care.
You can also access the Help and Support Center by selecting
Start > Help and Support.
Open Print Window (fn+f2)
In Windows the fn+f2 hotkey opens the print options window of
the active Windows application.
Open Internet Explorer (fn+f3)
The fn+f3 hotkey opens Internet Explorer.
2–8
■
Until you have set up your Internet or network services, the
fn+f3 hotkey opens the Windows Internet Connection wizard.
For information about using this wizard and other Internet
connection methods, refer to the printed Getting Started
guide included with your notebook.
■
After you have set up your Internet or network services and
your Web browser home page, you can use the fn+f3 hotkey to
quickly access your home page and the Internet.
Switch Image (fn+f4)
The fn+f4 hotkey switches the image among display devices
connected to the system. For example, if an optional monitor
is connected to the notebook through the monitor port, each time
you press the fn+f4 hotkey the image will switch among the
notebook display, the monitor display, and a simultaneous display
on both the notebook and the monitor.
Most monitors receive video information from the notebook
using the external VGA video standard. The fn+f4 hotkey can also
toggle images among other devices receiving video information
from the notebook.
The following video transmission types, with examples of devices
that use them, are supported by the fn+f4 hotkey:
■
LCD (notebook display)
■
External VGA (most monitors)
■
S-Video (televisions, camcorders, VCRs, and video capture
boards with S-Video–in jacks)
■
Composite video (televisions, camcorders, VCRs, and video
capture boards with composite video-in jacks)
video devices can be connected to the system only
✎ Composite
by using an HP xc2000 Notebook All-in-One Media Cable.
2–9
Initiate Standby (fn+f5)
The fn+f5 hotkey is set by default to initiate standby.
When standby is initiated, your work is saved in random access
memory (RAM), the screen clears, and power is conserved.
While the notebook is in standby, the power/standby lights blink.
■
To initiate standby, the notebook must be on. If the notebook
is in hibernation, you must restore from hibernation before
you can initiate standby.
■
To resume from standby or restore from hibernation, briefly
press the powe/standby button.
For more information about using standby and hibernation, see
Chapter 3, “Power.”
The function of the fn+f5 hotkey can be changed in the operating
system. For example, you can set the fn+f5 hotkey to initiate
hibernation instead of standby. In all Windows operating system
windows, references to the sleep button apply to the fn+f5 hotkey.
For information about changing the function of the fn+f5 hotkey,
see the “Setting Other Power Preferences” section in Chapter 3,
“Power.”
For more information about using standby and hibernation, see
Chapter 3, “Power.”
2–10
Initiate QuickLock (fn+f6)
The fn+f6 hotkey initiates the QuickLock security feature.
QuickLock protects your work by displaying the operating
system Log On window. While the Log On window is displayed,
the notebook cannot be accessed until a Windows user password
or a Windows administrator password is entered.
Before you can use QuickLock, you must set a Windows user
password or a Windows administrator password. For instructions,
refer to the Help and Support Center. To access the Help and
Support Center, press the fn+f1 hotkey or select Start > Help and
Support.
»
To use QuickLock, press fn+f6 to display the Log On window
and lock the notebook. Then follow the instructions on the
screen to enter your Windows user password or your
Windows administrator password and access the notebook.
For information about combining Windows passwords with HP
passwords, refert to Chapter 6, “Security.”
Decrease Brightness (fn+f7)
The fn+f7 hotkey decreases the brightness of the notebook
screen. The longer you hold down the fn+f7 hotkey, the more the
screen dims. Decreasing screen brightness conserves power.
»
To increase screen brightness, press the fn+f8 hotkey.
Increase Brightness (fn+f8)
The fn+f8 hotkey increases the brightness of the notebook
screen. The longer you hold down the fn+f8 hotkey, the more the
screen brightens.
»
To decrease screen brightness, press the fn+f7 hotkey.
2–11
Media Activity Hotkeys (fn+f9 through fn+f12)
The following 4 media activity hotkeys can control the play of an
audio CD or a DVD. To control the play of a video CD, use the
media activity controls in your video CD player.
Play, Pause, or Resume an Audio CD or a DVD
(fn+f9)
■
If the audio CD or the DVD is not playing, press the fn+f9
hotkey to begin or resume the play.
■
If the audio CD or the DVD is playing, press the fn+f9 hotkey
to pause the play.
Stop an Audio CD or a DVD (fn+f10)
The fn+f10 hotkey stops the play of an audio CD or a DVD.
You must stop a CD or DVD that is playing before you can
remove it from the optical drive. For more information about
inserting or removing a CD or DVD, see the “Inserting or
Removing a Disc” section in Chapter 4, “Multimedia.”
Play Previous Track or Chapter of an Audio
CD or a DVD (fn+f11)
The fn+f11 hotkey plays the previous track of an audio CD or the
previous chapter of a DVD that is playing.
Play Next Track or Chapter of an Audio CD or
a DVD (fn+f12)
The fn+f12 hotkey plays the next track of an audio CD or the next
chapter of a DVD that is playing.
2–12
Display System Information (fn+esc)
The fn+esc hotkey displays information about system hardware
components and software version numbers.
To clear the display, press esc.
In the fn+esc display, the version of the system BIOS (basic
input-output system) is displayed as the BIOS date. On some
notebook models, the BIOS date is displayed in decimal format.
The BIOS date is sometimes called the system ROM version
number. For information about updating the system ROM, see the
“Software Updates” section in Chapter 8, “Software Updates and
Recoveries and System Software.”
2–13
Keypads
You can do keypad work with your notebook by using the
embedded numeric keypad in the notebook keyboard or by
connecting an optional external numeric keypad.
The embedded numeric keypad cannot be used while an external
keypad is connected to the notebook.
Using the Embedded Numeric Keypad
The embedded numeric keypad consists of 15 keys that can be
used like the keys on an external numeric keypad. When the
embedded numeric keypad is turned on, each keypad key
performs the functions indicated by the icon in the upper-right
corner of the key.
2–14
Turning the Embedded Numeric Keypad
On and Off
When the embedded numeric keypad is off, press fn+num lk 1 to
turn the keypad on. The num lock light 2 is turned on.
When the embedded numeric keypad is on, press fn+num lk to turn
the keypad off. The num lock light is turned off.
2–15
Switching the Functions of Keypad Keys
You can temporarily switch the functions of an embedded
numeric keypad key between its standard function and its keypad
function.
■
To use a key on the keypad as a keypad key while the keypad
is turned off, press and hold fn while pressing the key.
■
To use a key on the keypad as a standard key while the
keypad is turned on:
❏ Press and hold fn to type with the key in lowercase.
❏ Press and hold fn+shift to type with the key in uppercase.
Releasing fn returns a keypad key to its set function. For example,
a keypad key returns to its keypad function if the keypad is turned
on or to its standard function if the keypad is turned off.
2–16
Using an External Numeric Keypad
embedded numeric keypad cannot be turned on while an
✎ The
optional external numeric keypad is connected to the notebook.
Most keys on most external numeric keypads function differently
when num lock mode is on than when num lock mode is off. For
example:
■
When num lock mode is on, most keypad keys type numbers.
■
When num lock mode is off, most keypad keys function like
the arrow, page up, or page down keys.
Turning Num Lock Mode On and Off
As You Work
To turn num lock mode on or off on an external numeric keypad
as you work, press the num lk key on the external keypad, not on
the notebook.
■
When an external numeric keypad is turned on and is in num
lock mode, the num lock light on the notebook is on.
■
When an external numeric keypad is turned off or is turned on
with num lock mode turned off, the num lock light on the
notebook is off.
2–17
3
Power
Power Sources
Selecting a Power Source
Use the following table to select a recommended power source
for the way you plan to use the notebook.
3–1
Power
Task
Recommended Power Source
Work in most software
applications
■ Charged battery pack in the notebook
■ External power supplied through one of
the following devices:
❐ AC adapter
❐ Optional Expansion Base
❐ Optional Auto/Air/AC Adapter
❐ Optional Automobile Power
Adapter/Charger
Charge or calibrate a
battery pack in the
notebook
External power supplied through one of the
following devices:
■ AC adapter
■ Optional Expansion Base
■ Optional Automobile Power
Adapter/Charger
■ Optional Auto/Air/AC Adapter
Ä
Install or modify
system software or
write to an optical disc
3–2
To prevent damage to the notebook
and aircraft systems, do NOT charge
the battery pack while you are using
an Auto/Air/AC Adapter on an aircraft.
External power supplied through one of the
following devices:
■ AC adapter
■ Optional Expansion Base
Power
Switching Between Battery and
External Power
The notebook runs on external power whenever external power
is available to the notebook. This conserves the charge in an
inserted battery pack. External power can be supplied through the
AC adapter or through an optional Expansion Base, Auto/Air/AC
Adapter, or Automobile Power Adapter/Charger.
Because the notebook switches between battery power and
external power according to the availability of external power:
■
If the notebook is running on battery power and you connect
the notebook to external power, the notebook switches to
external power.
■
If the notebook is running on external power (and contains a
charged battery pack) and you disconnect the notebook from
external power, the notebook switches to battery power.
A Power Meter icon is displayed by default in the notification
area, at the far right of the taskbar. The Power Meter icon changes
shape whenever the power source changes between battery power
and external power.
If the Power Meter icon is not displayed in the notification area:
1. Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and
Maintenance > Power Options.
2. Select the Advanced tab.
3. Select the Always show icon on the taskbar check box.
4. Select OK.
3–3
Power
Power Control and Light Locations
The following illustration is provided as a quick reference to the
locations of the power controls and lights on the notebook.
The function of each of these items is summarized in Chapter 1,
“Hardware.” Instructions for using these items are provided in
this chapter.
1 Display switch
4 fn+f5 hotkey
2 Power/standby button
5 Power/standby light
3 Power/standby light
6 Battery light
power/standby light associated with the power/standby
✎ The
button and the power/standby light on the front of the notebook
display the same information. The power/standby light
associated with the power/standby button is visible only when
the notebook is open; the power/standby light on the front of
the notebook is visible when the notebook is closed.
3–4
Power
Standby, Hibernation and Shutdown
Overviews
Standby
Standby reduces power to system components that are not in use.
When standby is initiated, your work is saved in random access
memory (RAM), the screen is cleared, and the power/standby
lights blink. Saving your work before initiating standby is not
usually necessary but is a recommended precaution. When you
resume from standby, your work is returned instantly to the
screen.
By default, the system initiates standby after 10 minutes of
notebook inactivity when the notebook is running on battery power
and after 25 minutes of inactivity when the notebook is running on
external power. For information about changing these settings, see
the “Using Power Schemes” section later in this chapter.
3–5
Power
Hibernation
Ä
CAUTION: If the configuration of the notebook system is changed during
hibernation, it might not be possible to resume from hibernation. When the
notebook is in hibernation:
■ Do not add or remove a memory module.
■ Do not remove or replace the hard drive.
■ Do not connect or disconnect an external device.
■ Do not insert or remove a CD, DVD, PC Card, or digital
memory card.
Hibernation saves your work to a hibernation file on the hard drive
and then shuts down the notebook. When hibernation is complete,
the power/standby lights are turned off.
When you restore from hibernation, your work is returned to the
screen where you left off. Restoring from hibernation takes a little
longer than resuming from standby but is much faster than
returning to your place manually after restarting the notebook.
To determine whether the notebook is in hibernation or turned
off, press the power/standby button.
■
If the notebook is in hibernation, your work is returned to the
screen.
■
If the notebook is off, Windows loads.
When the notebook is running on battery power, hibernation is
initiated by default after 30 minutes of notebook inactivity or
whenever the notebook reaches a critical low-battery condition.
Hibernation is enabled by default but can be disabled. To prevent
loss of work during a critical low-battery condition, disable
hibernation only during a battery pack calibration.
»
3–6
To verify that hibernation is enabled, select Start >
Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power
Options > Hibernate tab. If hibernation is enabled, the
Enable Hibernation check box is selected.
Power
Leaving Your Work
If you plan to resume shortly—Initiate standby for shorter times
and hibernation for longer times or for power conservation.
The amount of time a battery pack can support standby or
hibernation or hold a charge varies by notebook configuration and
the condition of the battery pack. Standby requires more power
than hibernation.
If you plan to resume within 2 weeks—Shut down the notebook.
If possible, connect the notebook to external power to keep an
inserted battery pack fully charged.
If the notebook will be unused and disconnected from external
power for more than 2 weeks—Shut down the notebook. To
extend the life of an inserted battery pack, remove the battery
pack and store it in a cool, dry location.
If an external power supply is uncertain—Initiate hibernation or
shut down the notebook. A power supply might become uncertain
because of such conditions as an electrical storm or a nearly
discharged battery pack.
Interference with Drive Media
To prevent the loss of playback or playback quality, do not initiate
standby or hibernation while playing a drive medium.
If standby or hibernation is initiated while a drive medium such as
a CD or DVD is in use, you might see the warning message
“Putting the computer into hibernation or standby may stop the
playback. Do you want to continue?” If the message is displayed,
select No. After you select No:
■
Playback might resume.
- or ■
Playback might stop and the screen might be cleared. To
return to your work, press the power/standby button and then
restart the disc.
3–7
Power
Standby, Hibernation and Shutdown
Procedures
This section explains the default standby, hibernation, and
shutdown procedures. For information about changing the
function of some of the power features on your notebook, see the
“Power Preferences” section later in this chapter.
The controls and lights discussed in this section are illustrated in
in the “Power Control and Light Locations” section earlier in this
chapter.
Turning the Notebook On or Off
Task
Procedure
Results
Turn on the
notebook.
Press the power/standby button. ■ Power/standby lights
are turned on.
Pressing the
■ Operating system is
power/standby button
loaded.
turns on the notebook
from standby, hibernation,
or shutdown.
Shut down the
notebook.
■ In Windows XP Home,
select Start > Turn Off
Computer > Turn Off.*†
■ In Windows XP
Professional, select
Start > Turn Off Computer >
Shut down > OK.*†
✎
■ Power/standby lights
are turned off.
■ Operating system is
shut down.
■ Notebook is turned off.
*If the system is unresponsive and you are unable to shut down the notebook
with this procedure, see the “Using Emergency Shutdown Procedures” section
later in this chapter.
†Depending on your network connections, the Turn Off Computer button might
be called the Shut Down button.
3–8
Power
Initiating or Resuming from Standby
Task
Procedure
Result
Initiate standby.
With the notebook on, use any of
the following procedures:
■ Press the fn+f5 hotkey.
■ Close the notebook.
■ Power/standby
lights blink.
■ Screen is cleared.
the notebook is
✎ When
closed, the display presses
the display switch, which
then initiates standby.
■ In Windows XP Home,
Computer > Stand By.*
■ In Windows XP Professional,
Computer > Stand by > OK.*
(If standby is not displayed,
press the down arrow, and then
select Stand by from the
drop-down list.)
Allow the system
to initiate
standby.
No action is required. The system
initiates standby
■ After 10 minutes of inactivity
while running on battery power.
■ After 25 minutes of inactivity
while running on external power.
■ Power/standby
lights blink.
■ Screen is cleared.
Resume from
standby.
■ Briefly press the power/standby
button.
- or -
■ Power/standby
lights are turned on.
■ Your work is
returned to the
screen.
■ Open the notebook.†
*Depending on your network connections, the Turn Off Computer button might
†Depending on your notebook configuration, you might also be able to resume
from standby by moving or activating a control on an optional mouse or by
opening the display if the notebook was closed while in standby.
3–9
Power
Initiating or Restoring from Hibernation
Hibernation cannot be initiated unless it is enabled. Hibernation
is enabled by default. To verify that hibernation remains enabled,
select Start > Control Panel > Performance and
Maintenance > Power Options > Hibernate tab. If hibernation
is enabled, the Enable hibernation check box is selected.
Task
Procedure
Result
Initiate
hibernation.
In Windows XP Home, select
Start >Turn Off Computer.* Then hold
down shift as you select the Stand By
button.
In Windows XP Professional,
select Start > Turn Off Computer >
Hibernate.* (If hibernate is not displayed,
press the down arrow, and then select
Hibernate from the drop-down list.)
■ Power/standby
lights are
turned off.
■ Screen is
cleared.
Allow the
system to
initiate
hibernation.
No action is required. If the notebook is
■ Power/standby
running on battery power and hibernation
lights are
is enabled, the system initiates
turned off.
hibernation
■ Screen is
■ After 30 minutes of notebook inactivity.
cleared.
■ Whenever the battery pack reaches a
critical low-battery condition.
Restore from
hibernation.
Press the power/standby button.†
■ Power/standby
lights are
turned on.
■ Your work is
returned to the
screen.
*Depending on your network connections, the Turn Off Computer button might
†If the system initiated hibernation because of a critical low-battery condition,
connect external power or insert a charged battery pack before you press the
power/standby button. (The system might not respond if the drained battery
pack is the only power source.)
3–10
Power
Using Emergency Shutdown Procedures
If the notebook does not respond to the standard Windows
shutdown procedure for your operating system, try the following
emergency shutdown procedures in the sequence provided:
■
Press ctrl+alt+del. Then
❏ In Windows XP Home, select Shut Down > Turn Off.
❏ In Windows XP Professional, select Shut down from the
drop-down list, and then select OK.
■
Press and hold down the power/standby button for at least
4 seconds.
■
Unplug the notebook from external power and remove the
battery pack. For battery pack removal instructions see the
“Replacing a Battery Pack” section later in this chapter.
3–11
Power
Power Preferences
Using Power Schemes
A power scheme controls the amount of power the notebook uses
while running on external power or on a battery pack, and also
sets the notebook to initiate standby or hibernation after a period
of inactivity you specify.
»
To select a preset power scheme or create a custom power
scheme, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and
Maintenance > Power Options, and then follow the
instructions on the screen.
Setting a Standby Password
To set the notebook to prompt for a password before resuming
from standby, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and
Maintenance > Power Options. Select the Advanced tab, select
the check box for Prompt for password when computer
resumes from standby, and then select OK. For information
about other passwords and security features, see Chapter 6,
“Security.”
Setting Other Power Preferences
You can change the function of the power/standby button, the
fn+f5 hotkey, and the display switch.
By default, when the notebook is on:
3–12
■
Briefly pressing the power/standby button initiates
hibernation.
■
Pressing the fn+f5 hotkey, called the sleep button in all
Microsoft operating systems, initiates standby.
■
Closing the notebook presses the display switch, which
initiates standby.
Power
To change the function of the power/standby button, the fn+f5
hotkey, or the display switch:
Maintenance > Power Options > Advanced tab.
❏ To change the function of the power/standby button, select
a function from the drop-down list for “When I press the
power/standby button on my computer.”
❏ To change the function of the fn+f5 hotkey, select a
function from the drop-down list for “When I press the
sleep button on my computer.”
❏ To change the function of the display switch, select a
function from the drop-down list for “When I close the lid
of my portable computer.” (The function of the display
switch when you open the display is unaffected by these
settings. When you open the display while the notebook is
in standby, the display switch turns on the notebook.)
2. Select OK.
The hibernate function is available in the power/standby button,
sleep button, and display switch drop-down lists only if
hibernation is enabled. If the hibernate function is not available
on these lists, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and
Maintenance > Power Options > Hibernate tab. Select the
Enable Hibernation check box, and then select OK.
3–13
Power
Battery Pack
Charging a Battery Pack
To prolong battery life and optimize the accuracy of battery
charge displays:
■
If you are charging a new battery pack:
❏ Charge the battery pack while the notebook is connected
to external power through the AC adapter.
❏ When you charge the battery pack, charge it fully.
■
If you are charging an in-use battery pack:
❏ Allow the battery pack to discharge to about 10 percent
of a full charge through normal use before charging it.
❏ When you charge the battery pack, charge it fully.
A battery pack inserted in the notebook charges whenever the
notebook is connected to external power through an AC adapter
or through an optional Expansion Base, Automobile Power
Adapter/Charger, or Auto/Air/AC Adapter.
Ä
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the notebook and aircraft systems,
do NOT charge the battery pack while you are using an Auto/Air/AC
Adapter on an aircraft.
A battery pack inserted in the notebook charges whether the
notebook is off or in use, but the battery pack charges faster while
the notebook is off. Charging might be delayed if a battery pack is
new, has been unused for 2 weeks or more, or is much warmer or
cooler than room temperature.
3–14
Power
The battery light displays charge status:
■
On: the battery pack is charging.
■
Blinking: the battery pack has reached a low-battery
condition and is not charging.
■
Off: the battery pack is fully charged or not installed.
For information about determining the amount of charge in a
battery pack, see the “Monitoring the Charge in a Battery Pack”
section next in this chapter.
Monitoring the Charge in a Battery Pack
Obtaining Accurate Charge Reports
To increase the accuracy of battery charge reports:
■
Allow a battery pack to discharge to about 10 percent of a full
charge through normal use before charging it.
■
When you charge a battery pack, charge it fully. The charge
in even a new battery pack might be reported inaccurately
until the battery pack has been fully charged at least once.
■
If a battery pack has been unused for one month or more,
calibrate the battery pack instead of simply charging it.
For information about battery calibration, see the “Calibrating a
Battery Pack” section later in this chapter.
3–15
Power
Displaying Charge Reports
To display battery charge information on the screen, use the
operating system Power Meter feature. To access the Power
Meter display:
■
Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and
Maintenance > Power Options > Power Meter tab.
- or ■
Select the Power Meter icon, which is displayed by default
in the notification area. To display the Power Meter icon if
the default setting has been changed, select Start > Control
Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options.
Select the Advanced tab, select the Always show icon on the
taskbar check box, and then select OK.
Power Meter displays battery status in both percent and time:
3–16
■
The percent indicates the amount of charge remaining in the
battery pack.
■
The time indicates the approximate running time remaining
on the battery pack if the battery pack continues to provide
power at the current level. For example, the time remaining
will decrease if you start playing a DVD and will increase if
you stop playing a DVD.
Power
Managing Low-Battery Conditions
This section describes default low-battery condition alerts and
system responses. The default battery light responses cannot be
changed. To change other responses, select Start > Control
Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options, and
then follow the instructions on the screen.
Identifying Low-Battery Conditions
When a battery pack that is the only power source for the
notebook reaches a low-battery condition, a text warning message
is displayed, and the battery light blinks.
If a low-battery condition is not resolved and the amount of
charge remaining in the battery pack continues to drop, the
notebook eventually enters a critical low-battery condition. If
the notebook is on or in standby when a critical low-battery
condition is reached:
■
If hibernation is enabled, the system initiates Hibernation.
Some unsaved work might be lost.
■
If hibernation is disabled, the notebook remains briefly in
standby, and then shuts down. All unsaved work is lost.
Hibernation is enabled by default. To verify that hibernation
remains enabled, select Start > Control Panel > Performance
and Maintenance > Power Options > Hibernate tab. If
hibernation is enabled, the Enable Hibernation check box is
selected.
3–17
Power
Resolving Low-Battery Conditions
Ä
CAUTION: To prevent problems when restoring from hibernation: If the
notebook has reached a critical low-battery condition and has begun to
initiate hibernation, do not restore power until hibernation is complete.
When hibernation is complete, the power/standby lights are turned off.
To resolve a low-battery condition:
3–18
■
If external power is available, connect the notebook to the
external power source.
■
If a charged battery pack is available, shut down the notebook
or initiate hibernation. Insert a charged battery pack, and then
turn on the notebook.
■
If no power source is available, save your work. Then initiate
hibernation or shut down the notebook.
Power
Calibrating a Battery Pack
When to Calibrate
Even if a battery pack is heavily used, calibration should be
necessary only once a month. You do not have to calibrate a new
battery pack before first use.
Calibration does not usually increase battery run time, but it can
increase the accuracy of battery charge displays, especially under
the following conditions:
■
When the battery pack has been unused for one month
or more.
■
When the notebook has been running primarily on
external power (and rarely on battery power) for more
than one month.
■
When battery charge displays report large changes in the
percent of power remaining within 2 minutes. For example,
if the Power Meter displays 20 percent of a full charge
remaining and then less than 2 minutes later displays only
5 percent of a full charge remaining, the rapid drop in charge
remaining indicates that the battery pack needs calibration.
For more information about battery charge displays, see the
“Monitoring the Charge in a Battery Pack” section earlier in
this chapter.
3–19
Power
How to Calibrate
To calibrate a battery pack, you must fully charge, fully
discharge, and then fully recharge the battery pack.
Charging the Battery Pack
Charge the battery pack while the notebook is on. To charge the
battery pack:
Ä
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the notebook and aircraft systems,
do NOT charge the battery pack while you are using an Auto/Air/AC
Adapter on an aircraft.
1. Insert the battery pack into the notebook.
2. Connect the notebook to external power through the
AC adapter or an optional Automobile Power
Adapter/Charger or Auto/Air/AC Adapter. (The notebook
battery light is on as the battery pack charges.)
3. Leave the notebook connected to external power until the
battery pack is fully charged. (The notebook battery light is
turned off.)
Discharging the Battery Pack
Ä
CAUTION: To prevent loss of work, save your work before beginning
an unattended discharge procedure.
The notebook must remain on throughout the discharge process.
The battery pack can discharge whether or not you are using the
notebook, but the battery pack will discharge faster if the
notebook is in use.
3–20
Power
If you use the notebook occasionally during the discharge process
described below and have set energy-saving timeouts, expect the
following performance from your system during the discharge:
■
Any unsaved work from your current session will be lost
when the battery pack is fully discharged and the notebook is
shut down.
■
The system will not turn off a connected optional monitor.
■
The system will not decrease hard drive speed while the
notebook is idle.
■
System-initiated standby will not occur.
To fully discharge the battery pack:
1. Disable hibernation. To disable hibernation, select Start >
Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power
Options > Hibernate tab. Then clear the Enable
Hibernation check box.
2. Display the settings on the Power Schemes tab. To access
the Power Schemes tab, select Start > Control Panel >
Performance and Maintenance > Power Options > Power
Schemes tab.
3. Record all settings in the Plugged In column and all settings
in the Running On Batteries column, so you can reset them
after calibration.
4. Use the drop-down lists to set each item in both columns
to Never.
5. Select OK.
6. Disconnect the notebook from the external power source,
but do not turn off the notebook.
7. Run the notebook on battery power until the battery pack is
fully discharged. When the battery pack is fully discharged,
the notebook is shut down.
3–21
Power
Recharging the Battery Pack
1. Connect the notebook to external power and maintain the
connection until the battery pack is fully recharged and the
battery light is turned off.
You can use the notebook while the battery pack is
recharging, but the battery pack will charge faster if the
notebook is turned off.
2. If the notebook is turned off, turn on the notebook when the
battery light is turned off, indicating that the battery pack is
fully charged.
3. Display the settings on the Power Schemes tab. To access
the Power Schemes tab, select Start > Control Panel >
Performance and Maintenance > Power Options > Power
Schemes tab.
4. Reenter the settings you recorded earlier for the items in the
Plugged In column and the Running on Batteries column.
5. Select OK.
Ä
3–22
CAUTION: To prevent an unintended battery drain and a potential loss
of work when the notebook reaches a critical low-battery condition,
reenable hibernation after calibrating the battery pack. To reenable
hibernation: Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and
Maintenance > Power Options > Hibernate tab. Select the
Enable Hibernation check box, and then select OK.
Power
Conserving Battery Pack Power
To extend the time that a battery pack can run the notebook from
a single charge, use the following battery conservation settings
and procedures.
Conserving Power as You Work
To conserve power as you work:
■
Prevent devices you are not using from drawing power from
the notebook. For example:
❏ Turn off wireless and local area network (LAN)
connections and close modem applications.
❏ Disconnect from the notebook any external devices that
are not plugged into an external power source.
❏ Stop or remove an inserted PC Card.
❏ Disable or remove an inserted digital memory card.
❏ Turn off a device connected to the S-Video–out jack.
■
Use optional, externally powered speakers instead of the
internal speakers whenever possible. When you use the
internal speakers, minimize system volume. Volume can be
adjusted with the volume buttons.
■
Minimize screen brightness. To decrease screen brightness,
press the fn+f7 hotkey. To increase screen brightness, press
the fn+f8 hotkey.
■
If you leave your work, initiate standby or hibernation, or
shut down the notebook.
3–23
Power
Selecting Power Conservation Settings
To set the notebook to use less power:
3–24
■
Select a short wait for the screen saver and select a screen
saver with minimal graphics and motion. To select a screen
saver and a screen saver wait time, select Start > Control
Panel > Appearance and Themes > Display > Screen
Saver tab, and then follow the instructions on the screen.
■
Select or create a power scheme that minimizes power use.
For more information about using power schemes, see the
“Using Power Schemes” section earlier in this chapter.
Power
Replacing a Battery Pack
Ä
CAUTION: To prevent loss of work when removing a battery pack that
is the only power source, shut down the notebook or initiate hibernation
before removing the battery pack. (If you initiate hibernation, do not
begin the following procedure until the power/standby lights are turned
off, indicating that hibernation is complete.)
Removing a Battery Pack
Although battery packs vary by model, the removal procedure is
the same for all models.
To remove a battery pack:
1. Turn the notebook upside down.
2. Slide the battery release latch 1 to release the battery pack.
3. Tilt the battery pack 2 and pull it out of the battery bay 3.
3–25
Power
Inserting a Battery Pack
Although battery packs vary by model, the insertion procedure is
the same for all models.
To insert a battery pack:
2. Lower the battery pack 1 into the battery bay and rotate it 2
until it is seated.
3–26
Power
Storing a Battery Pack
Ä
CAUTION: To prevent damage to a battery pack, do not expose it to
high temperatures for extended periods of time.
If the notebook will be unused and disconnected from external
power for more than 2 weeks, remove and store the battery pack.
High temperatures, which might be present in parked cars or
some workplaces, accelerate the self-discharge rate of a stored
battery pack. To prolong the charge of a stored battery pack, place
it in a location that is cool and dry.
Calibrate a battery pack that has been stored for one month or
more before using it.
Disposing of a Used Battery Pack
Å
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble,
crush, or puncture a battery pack; short the external contacts on a
battery pack; or dispose of a battery pack in fire or water. Do not
expose a battery pack to high temperatures above 60°C (140°F).
Replace only with a battery pack approved for this computer.
N
When a battery pack has reached the end of its useful life, do not
dispose of the battery pack in general household waste. Follow the
local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery pack
disposal.
In Europe, dispose of or recycle the battery packs by using the public
collection system or by returning them to HP, your authorized service
partner, or their agents.
3–27
4
Multimedia
Internal Speakers
The internal speakers, identified in the following illustration, play
sound in stereo from applications, the operating system, games,
drive media, the Internet, and other sources.
If an external device, such as headphones, is connected to the
audio-out jack, the internal speakers are disabled.
4–1
Multimedia
Volume Controls
You can adjust volume with the volume buttons on the notebook
or the volume control software available in your operating system
and in some multimedia applications. The volume mute button on
the notebook overrides all software volume settings.
■
To access the operating system volume controls, select
Start > Control Panel > Sounds, Speech, and Audio
Devices > Sounds and Audio Devices, and then select the
Volume tab.
❏ To access additional sound quality settings, such as
balance, select the Advanced button in the Device
volume pane.
❏ To display a volume icon in the notification area, select
the check box for Place volume icon in the taskbar, and
then select OK.
■
To adjust volume using the notebook volume buttons:
❏ To decrease volume, press the volume down button 1.
❏ To mute or restore volume, press the volume mute
button 2.
❏ To increase volume, press the volume up button 3.
When volume is muted, the mute light (on the volume mute button)
is turned on. When volume is restored, the mute light is turned off.
4–2
Multimedia
External Audio Devices
Using the Audio-Out (Headphone) Jack
Å
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume
before putting on headphones.
Ä
CAUTION: To prevent possible damage to an external device, do not
plug a monaural (single sound channel) plug into the audio-out jack.
The audio-out jack, sometimes called a headphone jack, connects
optional headphones or externally-powered stereo speakers. The
audio-out jack, identified in the following illustration, is also used
to connect the audio functions of an audio/video device such as a
television or VCR.
When you connect a device to the audio-out jack, use only a
3.5-mm plug.
When a device is connected to the audio-out jack, the internal
speakers are disabled.
4–3
Multimedia
Using the Audio-In (Microphone) Jack
The audio-in jack, identified in the following illustration,
connects an optional monaural (single sound channel)
microphone. The audio-in jack is sometimes called a
microphone jack.
It is recommended that you use an electret condenser microphone
with a 3.5-mm plug. If you connect a dynamic microphone, the
recommended sensitivity might not be achieved.
4–4
Multimedia
External Video Devices
Connecting an S-Video Device
(Select Models Only)
Connecting the Audio
The S-Video–out jack, available only on select models, supports
video signals only.
If you are setting up a configuration that combines audio and
video functions, such as playing a DVD movie on your notebook
and displaying it on your television, you need a standard 3.5-mm
audio cable available from most computer or electronics retailers.
Plug the stereo end of the audio cable into the audio-out
(headphone) jack on the notebook. Plug the other end of the cable
into the audio-in jack on the external device. For more
information about the notebook audio-out jack, see the “Using
the Audio-Out (Headphone) Jack” section earlier in this chapter.
4–5
Multimedia
Connecting the Video
To transmit video signals through the S-Video–out jack, you need
a standard S-Video cable, available from most computer or
electronics retailers.
Plug either end of the S-Video cable into the notebook
S-Video–out jack, illustrated below. Plug the other end of the
cable into the S-Video–in jack on the external device.
4–6
Multimedia
Displaying a Video Image
To display an image on the notebook display or a video device
display, both the notebook and the video device must be
turned on.
»
To switch the image between the notebook display and the
video device display, repeatedly press the fn+f4 hotkey.
Pressing the fn+f4 hotkey switches the image among the
notebook display, any connected displays, and simultaneous
display.
For more information about fn+f4 and other hotkeys, see the
“Hotkeys” section in Chapter 2, “TouchPad and Keyboard.”
4–7
Multimedia
CD and DVD Procedures
Inserting or Removing a Disc
Use the following procedures to insert or remove an optical disc
such as a CD or a DVD. A disc that is playing must be stopped
before it can be removed. To stop a disc, press the fn+f10 hotkey.
■
To insert a disc—Be sure the notebook is turned on. Then
press the release button 1 on the drive bezel to release the
media tray. Pull the tray outward 2, place the disc label-side
up on the media tray 3, and then close the media tray 4.
■
To remove a disc while the notebook is turned on—Press
the release button on the drive bezel to release the media tray.
Pull the tray outward, remove the disc, and then close the
media tray.
■
To remove a disc while the notebook is turned off:
a. Insert the end of a small object like a paper clip into
the release access 5 in the front bezel of the drive.
b. Press gently on the paper clip until the media tray is
released.
c. Pull the tray outward, remove the disc, and then close
the media tray.
4–8
Multimedia
Using Media Activity Hotkeys
Media activity hotkeys are preset combinations of the fn key 1
and 4 of the function keys. You can use these hotkeys to control
the play of an audio CD or a DVD that is inserted in the optical
drive.
To control the play of an inserted video CD, use the media
activity controls in your video CD player application.
■
To play, pause, or resume an inserted audio CD or a DVD,
press the fn+f9 hotkey 2.
■
To stop an inserted audio CD or a DVD that is playing, press
the fn+f10 hotkey 3.
■
To play the previous track of an audio CD or the previous
chapter of a DVD that is playing, press the fn+f11 hotkey 4.
■
To play the next track of an audio CD or the next chapter of a
DVD that is playing, press the fn+f12 hotkey 5.
For more information about these and other hotkeys, see the
“Hotkeys” section in Chapter 2, “TouchPad and Keyboard.”
4–9
Multimedia
Setting AutoPlay Preferences
AutoPlay is the operating system feature that determines how the
notebook responds when you access files on a removable storage
device such as a DVD-ROM drive, a DVD/CD-RW Combo
Drive, or a DVD+RW/R and CD-RW Combo Drive.
AutoPlay default settings vary by notebook model and
configuration. For example, the first time you insert a CD or DVD
into an optical drive and close the tray, the CD or DVD might
begin playing or the AutoPlay pop-up window might be
displayed. If the AutoPlay pop-up window is displayed, select
your preferences as instructed on the screen.
The default AutoPlay settings can be changed. For example, you
can set the notebook to display a slide show of the pictures on a
CD containing digital photographs, begin playing the first track
of a CD containing music, or display the names of the folders and
files on a CD containing data files. You can also set the notebook
to prompt you for a preference each time you insert a disc or to do
nothing when you insert a disc.
At many AutoPlay settings, there might be a pause of several
seconds while AutoPlay opens both the disc and the associated
disc player application.
AutoPlay preferences are not available for diskette drives, but can
be applied to most other removable storage devices. AutoPlay
preferences can be set for a digital memory card such as a Secure
Digital (SD) Memory Card, Memory Stick, Memory Stick Pro,
xD-Picture Card, MultiMediaCard, or SmartMedia (SM) card.
To access AutoPlay settings:
1. Select Start > My Computer.
2. In the Devices with Removable Storage group, right-click
an item such as a DVD-ROM drive.
3. Right-click Properties.
4. Select the AutoPlay tab.
4–10
Multimedia
Protecting Playback
To prevent the loss of playback or playback quality:
■
For optimal playback quality, save your work and close all
open applications before playing a CD or a DVD.
■
Dock or undock the notebook from an optional Expansion
Base before or after playing a disc, not while playing a disc.
Do not initiate standby or hibernation while playing a disc. If
standby or hibernation is initiated while a disc is in use, you
might see the warning message “Putting the computer into
hibernation or standby might stop the playback. Do you want to
continue?” If this message is displayed, select No. After you
select No:
■
Playback might resume.
- or ■
Playback might stop and the screen might be cleared. To
return to your work, press the power/standby button and then
restart the disc.
4–11
Multimedia
Protecting a CD or DVD Write Process
Ä■
CAUTION: To prevent loss of work and damage to a disc:
Before writing to a disc, connect the notebook to a reliable external
power source. Do not write to a disc while the notebook is running
on battery power.
■ Before writing to a disc, close all open applications (including
screen savers and antivirus software) except the disc software you
are using.
■
■
Do not copy directly from a source disc to a destination disc or from
a network drive to a destination disc. Instead, copy from a source
disc or network drive to your hard drive, and then copy from your
hard drive to the destination disc.
Do not use the notebook keyboard or move the notebook while the
notebook is writing to a disc. The write process is sensitive to
vibration.
Observing the Copyright Warning
It is a criminal offense, under applicable copyright laws, to make
unauthorized copies of copyright-protected material, including
computer programs, films, broadcasts, and sound recordings.
This notebook should not be used for such purposes.
4–12
Multimedia
Changing DVD Region Settings
Ä
CAUTION: To prevent selecting a region setting that is not your
permanent preference, consider that the region setting on your DVD-ROM
drive, DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive, or DVD+RW/R and CD-RW Combo
Drive can be changed only 5 times.
■ The region setting you select the fifth time becomes the permanent
region setting on the DVD-ROM drive or Combo Drive.
■ The number of allowable region changes remaining on the drive is
displayed in all software that can be used to change a DVD region
setting.
Most DVDs that contain copyrighted files also contain region
codes. The region codes help protect copyrights internationally.
You can play a DVD containing a region code only if the region
code on the DVD matches the region setting on your DVD-ROM
drive or Combo Drive. If the region code on a DVD does not
match the region setting on your DVD-ROM drive or Combo
Drive, the message, “Playback of content from this region is not
permitted,” is displayed when you insert the DVD.
To play the DVD, you must change the region setting on your
DVD-ROM drive or Combo Drive. DVD region settings can be
changed in the operating system or in some multimedia
applications, as described in the following sections.
Changing DVD Settings in the Operating System
To change DVD region settings in the operating system:
Maintenance > System. Select the Hardware tab. On the
Hardware tab, select the Device Manager button.
2. Select DVD/CD-ROM drives, right-click the DVD-ROM
drive or Combo Drive for which you want to change the
region setting, and then select Properties.
3. Select the DVD Region tab, and then follow the instructions
on the screen.
4–13
Multimedia
Changing DVD Settings in a Multimedia
Application
If you use Sonic RecordNow! or InterVideo WinDVD Player
software, you might find it more convenient to change DVD
region settings within those applications than to change DVD
region settings in the operating system.
To access instructions for changing DVD region settings within
■
Sonic RecordNow!, select Start > All Programs > Sonic
RecordNow! Then select the Help button, identified with a
question mark icon, on the RecordNow! console.
■
InterVideo WinDVD Player, select Start > All Programs >
InterVideo WinDVD Player. Then select Help on the menu
bar of the WinDVD console.
Depending on your region and notebook model, multimedia
applications such as Sonic RecordNow! and InterVideo WinDVD
Player might be included with your notebook.
For more information about Sonic RecordNow! and InterVideo
WinDVD Player, see the “Multimedia Software” section later in
this chapter.
4–14
Multimedia
Multimedia Software
Multimedia Software Overview
A variety of multimedia applications that you can use to play,
create, and manage digital media is included with your notebook.
Most can be accessed from a desktop icon or from Start > All
Programs. Others might be provided on CD.
Most multimedia applications include a Help file that you can
access from the menu bar or from an icon that might be identified
with a question mark. Most applications also include tutorials.
You can obtain customer support for any multimedia application
included with your notebook.
CDs and DVDs contain player software which is not
✎ Some
included with your notebook, such as PCFriendly. If you insert a
disc that contains player software which is not included with your
notebook, you are prompted to install the player software. If you
prefer to use multimedia applications which are included with
your notebook, decline the player installation and close the
installation window.
Before using any multimedia application, it is recommended that
you review the “Setting AutoPlay Preferences” and “Protecting
Playback” and “Protecting a CD or DVD Write Process” sections
earlier in this chapter.
4–15
Multimedia
Selecting Multimedia Applications
The multimedia software included with your notebook is
determined by your region and notebook model.
The following list describes the capabilities of some of the
multimedia applications that might be included with your
notebook.
■
Microsoft Windows Media Player can be used to play CDs
and DVDs, copy music to or from CDs, listen to radio
stations, and search for and organize digital media files.
■
Sonic RecordNow! can be used to back up data or audio CDs
and DVDs, transfer audio files from a CD to a hard drive,
play movies, and create audio CDs.
■
InterVideo WinDVD Player can be used to play DVDs.
■
Windows MovieMaker can be used to create and edit home
movies using basic drag-and-drop procedures.
■
InterVideo WinDVD Creator can be used to create, edit, and
burn movies to a DVD or video CD or to present a group of
still photographs as a slide show. WinDVD Creator is
provided on CD. For installation instructions, see the next
section, “Installing WinDVD Creator.”
Your notebook might include additional multimedia applications.
Be sure to explore
4–16
■
Your desktop icons.
■
The applications listed at Start > All Programs.
■
The preloaded items that might be available at Start > All
Programs > SW Setup.
Multimedia
Installing WinDVD Creator
If WinDVD Creator is included with your notebook, it is provided
on an InterVideo WinDVD Creator CD.
WinDVD Creator can be installed only from a DVD/CD-RW
Combo Drive or a DVD+RW/R and CD-RW Combo Drive.
If your system does not include either of these drives, you
cannot install WinDVD Creator from an InterVideo WinDVD
Creator CD.
To install WinDVD Creator:
1. Connect the notebook to reliable external power.
2. Close any open applications.
3. Insert the InterVideo WinDVD Creator CD into the Combo
Drive. After several seconds, an installation wizard is
displayed.
If the installation wizard does not display, your AutoPlay
settings might have been modified. To proceed with the
WinDVD installation, select Start > Run. In the Open text
field, type: x:\setup.exe (where x is your Combo Drive
designation), and then select OK.
4. When the installation wizard is displayed, follow the
installation instructions on the screen.
For more information about AutoPlay settings, see the “Setting
AutoPlay Preferences” section earlier in this chapter.
4–17
5
Wireless (Select Models Only)
If your notebook is equipped with an integrated wireless device
such as 802.11 or Bluetooth wireless devices, you have a wireless
notebook.
■
An 802.11 wireless notebook can connect to wireless
networks in corporate offices, your home, and public places.
Wireless networks include wireless local area networks
(WLANs) or “hotspots.” Hotspots are wireless access points
available in public places, such as airports, restaurants, coffee
shops, hotels, and universities.
■
A Bluetooth wireless notebook can connect to other
Bluetooth wireless-enabled devices using a wireless personal
area network (PAN).
Your notebook has a button that may be used to enable and
disable the 802.11 and Bluetooth wireless devices and an
associated light to indicate the state of the wireless devices.
In addition to the wireless button and light, your notebook has a
software utility, Wireless Assistant, that enables you to control
your wireless devices. Wireless Assistant is a software utility that
enables you to turn on and off the 802.11 and Bluetooth wireless
devices individually. For more information on using Wireless
Assistant, refer to the “Device Power States” section in this
chapter.
5–1
Wireless Local Area Network
With the 802.11 wireless device, you can access a wireless local
area network (WLAN), which is composed of other computers
and accessories linked by a wireless router or a wireless access
point.
■
A large scale WLAN, such as a corporate WLAN or public
WLAN hotspot, typically use wireless access points, that can
handle a large number of computers and accessories and can
separate critical network functions.
■
A home or small office WLAN typically uses a wireless
router, which enables several wireless and wired computers to
share an Internet connection, a printer, and files without
additional pieces of hardware or software. Wireless access
point and wireless router are often used interchangeably.
Notebooks with 802.11 WLAN devices may support one or more
of 3 IEEE physical layer standards:
5–2
■
802.11a
■
802.11b
■
802.11g
There are 3 popular implementations of WLAN adapters:
■
802.11b only
■
802.11b/g
■
802.11a/b/g
802.11b, the first popular WLAN standard, supports data rates of
up to 11 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 2.4 GHz. 802.11g,
which came later, also operates at 2.4 GHz but supports data rates
of up to 54 Mbps. An 802.11g WLAN device is backward
compatible with 802.11b devices, so they can operate on the same
network. 802.11a supports data rates of up to 54 Mbps but
operates at a frequency of 5 GHz. 802.11a is not compatible with
802.11b and 802.11g. For information on identifying the type of
device in your notebook, refer to the “Identifying a WLAN
Device” section in this chapter.
5–3
Setting Up a WLAN in Your Home
To set up a WLAN and connect to the Internet in your home, you
need the following equipment. The illustration below shows an
example of a completed wireless network installation that is
connected to the Internet. This wireless network includes
■
An optional broadband modem (either DSL or cable) and
high-speed Internet service purchased from an Internet
service provider (ISP) 1.
■
An optional wireless router (purchased separately) 2.
■
Your wireless notebook 3.
As this network grows, additional wireless and wired computers
can be connected to the network to access the Internet.
need technical assistance to install your WLAN, contact
✎ Iftheyourouter
manufacturer or your ISP.
5–4
Using a WLAN Connection
To use a WLAN connection:
■
Verify that all drivers required by the 802.11 wireless device
are installed and that the 802.11 wireless device is correctly
configured.
✎
If you are using an integrated 802.11 wireless device, all required
drivers are installed and the adapter is preconfigured and ready
for use.
■
If you are using an integrated 802.11 wireless device, verify
that the 802.11 wireless device is turned on. When the 802.11
wireless device is turned on, the wireless light is turned on. If
the wireless light is off, turn on the 802.11 wireless device.
Refer to the “Device Power States” section.
■
For your home WLAN, verify that your router is correctly
configured. For instructions, refer to your router
documentation.
range for subsequent WLAN connections vary,
✎ Functional
depending on your notebook WLAN implementation, router
manufacturer, and interference from varying types of walls and
other electronic devices.
For more information about using a WLAN connection:
■
Refer to information from your ISP and the documentation
included with your wireless router and other WLAN
equipment.
■
Access the information and Web site links provided at
■
Refer to the documentation included with your notebook. The
Troubleshooting guide on the Notebook Documentation CD
contains a section about wireless LAN device problems and
resolutions.
5–5
Using Wireless Security Features
When you set up your own WLAN or access an existing WLAN,
always ensure that security features are protecting the WLAN. If
you do not enable security on your WLAN, an unauthorized
wireless user can access your notebook data and use your Internet
connection without your knowledge.
The most common security levels are Wi-Fi Protected Access
(WPA)-Personal and Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP). In
addition to enabling WPA-Personal or WEP security encryption
on the router, you may want to use one or more of the following
security measures:
■
Change the default network name (SSID) and password.
■
Use a firewall.
■
Set security on your Web browser.
■
Enable MAC address filtering on the router.
For more information about WLAN security, refer to the HP Web
site at http://www.hp.com/go/wireless for details.
5–6
Installing Wireless Software (Optional)
Microsoft Windows XP supports WLAN configuration with the
Zero Client Configuration feature. HP provides a separate WLAN
configuration utility that must be installed if you plan to use
Cisco Compatible Extensions. Cisco Compatible Extensions
enable wireless devices to use Cicso-based WLANs.
Identifying a WLAN Device
To install HP WLAN software for an integrated 802.11 wireless
device, you need to know the name of the integrated 802.11
wireless device on your notebook. To identify an integrated
802.11 wireless device:
1. Display the names of all the 802.11 wireless devices on your
notebook:
a. Select Start > My Computer.
b. Right-click in the My Computer window.
c. Select Properties > Hardware tab > Device Manager >
Network Adapters.
2. Identify the 802.11 wireless device from the list that is
displayed:
❏ The listing for an 802.11 wireless device includes the term
wireless LAN, WLAN, or 802.11.
❏ If no 802.11 wireless device is listed, either your notebook
does not have an integrated 802.11 wireless device, or the
driver for the 802.11 wireless device is not properly
installed.
5–7
Accessing WLAN Software and Documentation
Your WLAN software is preloaded on your notebook and is
available in the Software Setup utility.
To install the WLAN software:
»
Select Start > All Programs > Software Setup, and then
follow the instructions on the screen. (When you are
prompted to select the software you want to install, select or
clear the corresponding check boxes.)
The WLAN software is also available as a SoftPaq at the HP Web
site. To access, download, and install the SoftPaq, use either of
the following procedures:
■
Select Start > Help and Support.
- or ■
Visit the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/support:
a. Choose your language and region.
b. Select the Download Drivers and Software radio button
c. Enter your computer model information, and then follow
the instructions provided at the Web site.
✎
WLAN software is provided in the Network category. To access
model information about your computer, refer to the serial
number label. The serial number label is on the bottom of the
notebook.
To access documentation for your WLAN software:
1. Install the WLAN software as instructed earlier in this
chapter.
2. Open the utility.
3. Select Help on the menu bar.
Troubleshooting Devices
For more troubleshooting information, visit the HP Web site
(http://www.hp.com/go/wireless) or refer to the documentation
included with your notebook.
5–8
Bluetooth (Select Models Only)
The Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless
communications that replace the physical cable connections that
traditionally link electronic devices such as
■
Network access points.
■
Computers (desktop, notebook, PDA).
■
Phones (cellular, cordless, smart phone).
■
Imaging devices (printer, camera).
■
Audio devices (headset, speakers).
The devices are represented in the Bluetooth for Windows
software by graphical icons that resemble their physical features,
which makes them easily recognizable and distinguishes them
from other classes of devices.
The Bluetooth for Windows software provides the following
functions:
■
Personal Information Management (PIM) item
transfer—Sends and receives information files such as
business cards, calendar items, notes, and message items to
and from another Bluetooth computer or device.
■
PIM synchronization—Synchronizes PIM data between a
computer, PDA, or cell phone using Bluetooth.
■
File Transfer—Sends and receives files to and from another
Bluetooth computer.
■
Network access (Personal Area Networking
Profile)—Enables 2 or more Bluetooth devices to form an
ad-hoc (peer-to-peer) network. Provides a mechanism that
enables a Bluetooth device to access a remote network
through a network access point. The network access points
can be traditional LAN data access points or group ad-hoc
networks that represent a set of devices that are attached only
to one another.
5–9
■
Dial-up networking—Connects Bluetooth devices to the
Internet.
■
Bluetooth serial port—Transfers data over the Bluetooth link
using a virtual COM port.
■
Hands-Free—Enables a vehicle-embedded, hands-free unit or
a notebook serving as a hands-free unit to establish a wireless
connection to a cellular phone and to act as the Bluetooth
cellular phone audio input and output mechanism.
■
Basic imaging—Provides a wireless connection between a
Bluetooth-enabled camera and other Bluetooth devices. The
camera can be controlled remotely by a notebook, and images
can be transferred from a camera to be stored on a computer
or to be printed.
■
Human interface device—Provides a wireless connection to
other Bluetooth devices, such as keyboards, pointing devices,
gaming devices, and remote monitoring devices.
■
Fax—Provides a Bluetooth connection that enables a
notebook to send or receive a fax message using a Bluetooth
cellular phone or modem.
■
Headset—Provides a wireless connection between a headset
and a notebook or cellular phone. The headset acts as the
device’s audio input and output mechanism and increases
mobility.
For more information about using Bluetooth with your notebook,
refer to the Wireless Documentation CD included with your
notebook.
5–10
Device Power States
The wireless button 1 enables and disables 802.11 wireless and
Bluetooth devices in conjunction with Wireless Assistant. By
default, the 802.11 wireless and Bluetooth devices and wireless
light 2 are turned on when you turn on the notebook.
on a wireless device does not automatically create a
✎ Turning
WLAN or connect you to a WLAN. For information on setting up
a WLAN refer to the “Wireless Local Area Network
(Select Models Only)” section in this chapter.
5–11
The 802.11 wireless and Bluetooth devices have 2 power states:
■
Enabled
■
Disabled
You can enable and disable the wireless devices with the wireless
button. When the wireless devices are enabled with the wireless
button, you can use Wireless Assistant to turn on and off the
devices individually. When the wireless devices are disabled, you
must enable them before you can turn them on or off with
Wireless Assistant.
To view the state of your wireless devices, place the cursor over
the Wireless Assistant icon in the notification area, or open
Wireless Assistant by double-clicking the icon in the notification
area. Wireless Assistant displays the status of the devices as on,
off, or disabled.
For more information about Wireless Assistant:
1. Open Wireless Assistant by double-clicking the icon in the
notification area.
2. Select the Help button.
5–12
Turning On the Devices
If
And
■
Wireless
Assistant shows
that both WLAN
and Bluetooth
are off
■
Wireless light
is off
■
Wireless
Assistant shows
that both WLAN
and Bluetooth are
disabled*
■
Wireless light
is off
■
Wireless
Assistant shows
that one device is
on and the other
device is off
■
Wireless light
is on
You want to turn on
either or both
devices
Then
1. Right-click the Wireless
Assistant icon in the
notification area.
2. Select the device or devices
you want to turn on.
✎
If the wireless devices
are turned off, pressing
the wireless button
disables both devices.
The button does not
turn on the devices.
You want to turn on
either or both
devices
1. Press the wireless button.
(The devices return to their
previous on or off state.)
2. If the wireless devices are
turned off, right-click the
Wireless Assistant icon in
the notification area.
You want to turn on
either or both
devices
notification area.
*If the wireless devices are not both on when you disable the devices, pressing
the wireless button again returns the devices to their previous on or off state.
Pressing the button does not turn on both devices.
want your wireless devices to be turned on when you turn
✎ Ifonyou
your notebook, you must turn them on before you shut down
or restart.
5–13
Turning Off and Disabling the Devices
If
■
Wireless
Assistant shows
that both WLAN
and Bluetooth
are on
■
Wireless light
is on
■
Wireless
Assistant shows
that both WLAN
and Bluetooth
are off
■
Wireless light
is off
■
Wireless
Assistant shows
that one device is
on and the other
device is off*
■
Wireless light
is on
And
Then
You want to disable
both devices
Press the wireless button.
You want to turn off
either or both
devices
notification area.
you want to turn off.
You want to disable
both devices
You want to disable
both devices
You want to turn off
both devices.
notification area.
you want to turn off.
*If the wireless devices are not both on when you disable the devices, pressing
the wireless button again returns the devices to their previous on or off state.
Pressing the button does not turn on both devices.
5–14
6
Security
Security Features
solutions are designed to act as deterrents. These
✎ Security
deterrents may not prevent a product from being mishandled or
stolen.
The security features provided with the notebook can protect the
notebook, personal information, and data from a variety of risks.
Depending on your environment, some security features may be
unnecessary. It is recommended that you follow the procedures in
this chapter for using
■
Antivirus software
■
Windows updates
■
Firewall software
6–1
Security
In addition to the Windows operating system security measures,
the following table may help you decide which other security
features to use.
Most of these security features can be configured in the
Setup utility. For more information, refer to “Setup Utility,” in
Chapter 8.
To Protect Against
Use This Security Feature
Unauthorized use of the notebook
■ Quick Lock
■ Power-on password*
Unauthorized access to the Setup
utility (f10)
HP administrator password*
Unauthorized startup from a CD or a
diskette
Device Security*
Unauthorized access to data
■ HP administrator password
■ Firewall software
■ Windows updates
Unauthorized access to the
BIOS settings and other system
identification information
HP administrator password*
Unauthorized removal of the notebook
Security cable slot (used with an
optional security cable)
For more information on the
security cable slot, refer to the
“Optional Security Cable” section in
this chapter.
*This security feature is configured in the Setup utility. The Setup utility is a
non-Windows utility accessed by pressing f10 when the notebook is started or
restarted. The procedures for using the Setup utility to set specific security
preferences are provided in this chapter. For information about displaying
system information and using other Setup utilities, refer to “Setup Utility” in
Chapter 8.
6–2
Security
Security Preferences in the
Setup Utility
Most security preferences are set in Setup utility. Because the
Setup utility is a non-Windows utility, it does not support the
pointing devices on your notebook. When using the Setup utility,
you must use the keys on your notebook to navigate and make
selections.
For more details, refer to “Setup Utility” in Chapter 8.
QuickLock
The fn+f6 hotkey initiates the operating system QuickLock
security feature.
QuickLock protects your notebook by displaying the operating
system log-on screen. While the log-on screen is displayed, the
notebook cannot be accessed until a Windows user password or
Windows administrator password is entered.
Before you can use the QuickLock feature, you must set a
Windows user password or Windows administrator password. For
instructions, refer to the Help and Support Center by selecting
■
To initiate QuickLock, press fn+f6.
■
To exit QuickLock, enter your Windows user password or
Windows administrator password.
6–3
Security
Passwords
Most security features use passwords. Whenever you set a
password, write down the password and store it in a secure
location away from the notebook.
6–4
■
If you forget your power-on password and your
HP administrator password, you cannot start up the
notebook or restore from hibernation. Call Customer Care
or your authorized service partner for additional information.
■
If you forget your HP administrator password, you will not be
able to access the Setup utility.
Security
HP and Windows Passwords
HP security features and Windows operating system security
features work independently from one another. For example,
a device disabled in the Setup utility cannot be enabled in
Windows.
Some password options are provided by your HP software, and
others are provided by your operating system. HP passwords
and Windows passwords are also independent of one another.
The following table lists the different passwords used by HP and
Windows and describes their functions. For additional
information about Windows passwords, such as screen-saver
passwords, refer to Start > Help and Support.
HP Passwords
Function
HP administrator password
Protects access to the Setup utility.
Power-on password
Used to access the notebook during startup
and when you restart the notebook.
Windows Passwords
Function
Administrator password*
Protects Windows administrator-level
access to notebook contents.
User password*
Protects access to a Windows user
account.
To protect access to notebook contents
when the notebook is resumed from
standby, you can set a password prompt to
display. Refer to “Setting a Standby
Password” in Chapter 3.
*For information about setting a Windows administrator password or a
Windows user password, select Start > Help and Support.
6–5
Security
HP and Windows Password Guidelines
HP and Windows passwords are not interchangeable. You must
use an HP password at an HP password prompt and a Windows
password at a Windows password prompt. For example:
■
If a power-on password is set, the power-on password (not a
Windows password) must be entered when the notebook
starts up or restores from hibernation.
■
If you set Windows to prompt for a password before
resuming from standby, a Windows password (not a power-on
password) must be entered to resume from standby.
The same word or series of letters or numbers used for an HP
password can be used for another HP password or for a Windows
password, with the following considerations:
■
The text of HP passwords can be any combination of up to
8 letters and numbers and is not case sensitive.
■
An HP password must be set and entered with the same type
of keys. For example, an HP password set with keyboard
number keys will not be recognized if it is entered with
keypad number keys.
For information about the keypad, refer to “Keypads” in
Chapter 2.
6–6
Security
Although you can use the same text for various passwords, HP
passwords and Windows passwords function independently. Even
if you plan to use the same text for an HP password and a
Windows password, you must set the HP password in the Setup
utility and the Windows password in your operating system.
their names are similar, an HP administrator password
✎ Although
and a Windows administrator password have different functions.
For example, a Windows administrator password cannot be used
to access the Setup utility, and an HP administrator password
cannot provide administrator-level access to your notebook
contents. You can, however, use the same text for both passwords.
6–7
Security
HP Administrator Password
The HP administrator password protects the configuration
settings and system identification information in the Setup utility.
After this password is set, it must be entered to access the Setup
utility.
The HP administrator password
■
Is not interchangeable with a Windows administrator
password, although both can use the same word or series
of letters, or numbers.
■
Does not display as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted.
■
Must be set and entered with the same type keys. For
example, an HP administrator password set with keyboard
number keys will not be recognized if you enter it with
embedded numeric keypad number keys.
■
Can include any combination of up to 8 letters and numbers
and is not case sensitive.
Setting HP Administrator Passwords
An HP administrator password is set, changed, or deleted in the
Setup utility.
To manage the password:
1. Shut down the notebook. If you are not sure whether the
notebook is off or in hibernation, turn the notebook on by
pressing the power/standby button, and then shut down the
notebook through the operating system.
2. Be sure that the hard drive is inserted into the notebook
(not into an optional docking device or external MultiBay).
6–8
Security
3. Open the Setup utility by turning on or restarting the
notebook. Press f10 while Setup message is displayed in the
lower-left corner of the screen.
4. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Administrator
Password, and then press enter.
❏ To set an HP administrator password, type your password
in the Enter New Password and Confirm New
Password fields, and then press enter.
❏ To change an HP administrator password, type your
current password in the Enter Current Password field,
type the new password in the Enter New Password and
Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter.
❏ To delete an HP administrator password, type your current
password in the Enter Password field, press enter 3 times,
and then press f10.
5. To save your preferences and exit the Setup utility, press f10,
and then follow the instructions on the screen.
Your preferences are set when you exit the Setup utility and take
effect when the notebook restarts.
Entering HP Administrator Passwords
At the Enter SETUP Password prompt, type your HP
administrator password with the same keys you used to set the
password, and then press enter. After 3 unsuccessful attempts to
enter the HP administrator password, you must restart the
notebook and try again.
6–9
Security
Power-On Passwords
A power-on password prevents unauthorized use of the notebook.
After this password is set, it must be entered each time the
notebook is turned on or restarted. A power-on password
■
Does not display as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted.
■
Must be set and entered with the same type keys. For
example, a power-on password set with keyboard number
keys will not be recognized if you enter it with embedded
numeric keypad number keys.
■
Can include any combination of up to 8 letters and numbers
and is not case sensitive.
Setting Power-On Passwords
A power-on password is set, changed, or deleted in the Setup
utility.
To manage the password:
6–10
Security
4. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Power-On
password, and then press enter.
❏ To set a power-on password, type the password in the
Enter New Password and Confirm New Password
fields, and then press enter.
❏ To change a power-on password, type the current
password in the Enter Current Password field, type the
new password in the Enter New Password and Confirm
New Password fields, and then press enter.
❏ To delete a power-on password, type the current password
in the Enter Current Password field, press enter 3 times,
and then press f10.
Entering Power-On Passwords
At the power-on password prompt, type your password, and then
press enter. After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the password,
you must restart the notebook and try again.
6–11
Security
Device Security
From the Setup utility Device Security menu, you can disable the
ability of the notebook to start from a CD or a diskette drive.
To disable or reenable notebook capabilities in the Setup utility:
4. Select Security > Device Security, and then enter your
preferences.
5. Use the arrow keys to select an item. Then:
❏ To disable an item, press f5 or f6 to toggle the field for the
item to Disable, and then press enter.
❏ To reenble an item, press f5 or f6 to toggle the field for the
item to Enable, and then press enter.
6. When a confirmation prompt with your preference selected is
displayed, press enter to save your preference.
6–12
Security
Antivirus Software
When you use the notebook for e-mail, network, or Internet
access, you expose the notebook to computer viruses. Computer
viruses can disable your operating system, applications, or
utilities or cause them to function abnormally.
Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in
most cases, repair damage they have caused. To provide
protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software
must be updated.
Norton AntiVirus is preinstalled on the notebook. For information
about using and updating the Norton AntiVirus software:
»
Select Start > All Programs > Norton AntiVirus >Help
and Support.
For more information about computer viruses:
1. Select Start > Help and Support.
2. Type viruses into the Search field.
3. Press enter.
6–13
Security
Critical Security Updates for
Windows XP
Ä
CAUTION: Because new computer viruses are being detected all the
time, it is recommended that you install all critical updates as soon as
you receive an alert from Microsoft. You should also run Windows
Update on a monthly basis to install the latest recommended updates
from Microsoft.
A Critical Security Updates for Windows XP disc may have been
included with your notebook to provide additional updates
delivered after the computer was configured. Throughout the life
of the computer, Microsoft will continue to update the operating
system and make these updates available on their Web site.
To update your system using the Critical Security Updates for
Windows XP disc:
1. Insert the disc into the drive. The disc automatically runs the
installation application.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to install all updates. This
may take a few minutes.
3. Remove the disc.
6–14
Security
Firewall Software
When you use the notebook for e-mail, network, or Internet
access, it is possible for unauthorized persons to obtain
information about you, your notebook, and your data. Firewalls
monitor all incoming and outgoing traffic on your computer by
including features such as logging and reporting, automatic
alarms, and user interfaces for configuring the firewall. To protect
your privacy, it is recommended that you use firewall software.
Your notebook comes with preinstalled firewall software. Refer to
the online Help in the firewall software application for additional
information.
some circumstances a firewall can block access to
✎ Under
Internet games, interfere with printer or file sharing on a
network, or block authorized e-mail attachments. To
temporarily solve the problem, disable the firewall, perform the
task that is interfering with the firewall, and then reenable the
firewall. To permanently resolve the problem, reconfigure the
firewall.
6–15
Security
Optional Security Cable
solutions are designed to act as deterrents. These
✎ Security
deterrents may not prevent a product from being mishandled or
stolen.
To install a security cable:
1. Loop the security cable around a secured object.
2. Insert the key 1 into the cable lock 2.
3. Insert the cable lock into the security cable slot 3, and then
lock the cable lock with the key.
6–16
7
Hardware Upgrades and
Replacements
Device Connections
Connecting Any Powered Device
To connect the notebook to an optional external device that has a
power cord:
1. Be sure the device is turned off.
2. Connect the device to the jack or jack on the notebook
specified by the device manufacturer.
3. Plug the device power cord into a grounded AC outlet.
4. Turn on the device.
properly connected monitor or other display device does
✎ Ifnota display
an image, try pressing the fn+f4 hotkey to switch the
image to the new device.
To disconnect a powered external device from the notebook:
1. Turn off the device.
2. Disconnect the device from the notebook.
7–1
Hardware Upgrades and Replacements
Connecting a USB Device
USB (Universal Serial Bus) is a hardware interface that can be
used to connect an external device such as a USB keyboard,
mouse, drive, printer, scanner, or hub to the notebook or an
optional Expansion Base.
A hub is a connecting device that can be either powered or
unpowered. USB hubs can be connected to a USB port on the
notebook or to other USB hubs. Hubs support varying numbers of
USB devices and are used to increase the number of USB devices
in the system.
■
Powered hubs must be connected to external power.
■
Unpowered hubs must be connected either to a USB port on
the notebook or to a port on a powered hub.
The 3 USB ports (select models only) on the notebook support
USB 2.0-compliant, USB 1.1-compliant, and USB 1.0-compliant
devices.
7–2
Connecting a 1394 Device
IEEE 1394 is a hardware interface that can be used to connect a
high-speed multimedia or data storage device to the notebook.
Scanners, digital cameras, and digital camcorders often require
a 1394 connection.
You might have to load device-specific drivers and other software
before using some 1394 devices. For information about
device-specific software, refer to the device documentation or to
the Web site of the device manufacturer or provider.
The notebook 1394 port, illustrated below, supports IEEE 1394a
devices.
7–3
Connecting a Communication Device
For information about connecting and using the modem, refer to
the modem guides on the Notebook Documentation CD. Basic
instructions for connecting the modem and setting up Internet
service with an Internet service provider (ISP) are also provided
in the printed Getting Started guide included with your notebook.
For information about using an optional wireless device, visit
For information about using the Network Service Boot to connect
the notebook to a PXE (Preboot Execution Environment) server
during startup, see the “Using Advanced Setup Utility Features”
section in Chapter 8, “Software Updates and Recoveries and
System Software.”
For more information about modem, wireless, and network
connections, select Start > Help and Support. The Help and
Support utility provides communication information that includes
instructions, tutorials, and wizards that can help you set up or
troubleshoot a variety of connections.
Modem, network, and wireless troubleshooting information
is also provided in Troubleshooting on the Notebook
Documentation CD.
7–4
Digital Memory Cards
The 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader (select models only) can
support:
■
Memory Stick and Memory Stick Pro
■
xD-Picture Card
■
MultiMediaCard
■
SmartMedia (SM) card
■
Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card
Digital memory cards are often used for digital storage on
cameras, camcorders, and other handheld devices.
You can set the notebook to open the files on a digital memory
card in ways you specify. For example, you could set a digital
memory card to open with a slide show of the photographs it
contains. For instructions, see the “Setting AutoPlay Preferences”
section in Chapter 4, “Multimedia.”
The 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader light and the 6-in-1 Digital
Media Reader slot described in the following sections are
available only on models which include a 6-in-1 Digital Media
Reader.
7–5
Using the 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader Light
The 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader light is turned on when an
inserted digital memory card is being accessed. The 6-in-1
Digital Media Reader light is turned off when an inserted digital
memory card is inactive or when the 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader
slot is vacant.
7–6
Inserting a Digital Memory Card
Ä■
CAUTION: To prevent damage to digital memory card connectors:
Use minimal force when inserting a digital memory card into the
6-in-1 Digital Media Reader slot.
■ Do not move or transport the notebook while a digital memory card
is inserted in the 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader slot.
To insert a digital memory card:
1. Hold the card label-side up with the connectors facing the
notebook.
2. Gently slide the card into the 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader
slot until the card is seated. (The card will extend outward
slightly beyond the notebook.)
7–7
Removing a Digital Memory Card
To remove a digital memory card:
1. Close all applications and complete all activities that are
using the card. (To stop a data transfer, select the cancel
button in the Windows Copying window.)
2. Select the My Computer icon on the Windows Desktop.
3. Right-click the drive assigned to the card, and then select
Eject. (The card is stopped but is not released from the
6-in-1 Digital Media Reader slot.)
4. Slide the card out of the slot.
7–8
PC Cards
Ä
CAUTION: To preserve support for all PC Cards, do not install all of
the software or any of the enablers provided by a single PC Card
manufacturer. If you are instructed by the documentation included with
a PC Card to install device drivers:
■ Install only the device drivers for your operating system.
■ Do not install other software, such as card services, socket services,
or enablers, that might also be supplied by the PC Card
manufacturer.
A PC Card is a credit card–sized accessory designed to conform
to the standard specifications of the Personal Computer Memory
Card International Association (PCMCIA). PC Cards can be used
to add modem, sound, storage, wireless communication, or digital
camera functions to the notebook.
The notebook PC Card slot supports one Type I or Type II 32-bit
(CardBus) or 16-bit PC Card.
7–9
Inserting a PC Card
Ä■
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the PC Card connectors:
Use minimal force when inserting a PC Card into a PC Card slot.
■ Do not move or transport the notebook while a PC Card is inserted.
1. Hold the PC Card label-side up with the connectors facing the
notebook.
2. Gently slide the card into the slot until the card is seated.
7–10
Stopping or Removing a PC Card
Ä
CAUTION: To prevent loss of work or an unresponsive system, stop a
PC Card before removing it.
✎ Stopping a PC Card, even if it is not in use, conserves power.
To stop or remove a PC Card:
1. Close all applications and complete all activities that are
supported by the PC Card. Then
❏ To stop the PC Card, select the Safely Remove Hardware
icon in the notification area, and then select the PC Card.
(To display the Safely Remove Hardware icon, right-click
the taskbar, select Properties, clear the Hide inactive
icons check box, and then select OK.)
❏ To remove the PC Card, stop the PC Card as described
above, and then proceed to step 2.
2. Press the PC Card eject button 1. (You might need to press
the button once to extend the button, and then press the button
again to release the PC Card.)
3. Gently slide out the PC Card 2.
7–11
Drives
Adding a Drive to the System
The internal hard drive and optical drive are standard features of
the notebook. The type of optical drive varies by notebook model.
An optional drive can be added to the system by connecting it,
as instructed in the drive documentation, to one of the USB ports
or to the 1394 port. Hard drive capacity can also be added with a
microdrive PC Card or a digital memory card such as a Secure
Digital (SD) Memory Card.
Using the IDE Drive Light
Internal hard drive or optical drive activity is indicated by the
IDE (Integrated Drive Electronics) light.
7–12
Caring for Drives
Ä
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the notebook or a drive and loss
of work:
■ Do not remove the internal hard drive except for repair or
replacement. For instructions, see the “Replacing the Internal Hard
Drive” section next in this chapter.
■ Electrostatic discharge can damage electronic components. To
prevent electrostatic damage to the notebook or a drive, follow
these 2 precautions: (1) Discharge yourself from static electricity
before handling a drive by touching a grounded metal object and
(2) Avoid touching the connectors on a drive. For more information
about preventing electrostatic damage, refer to the “Electrostatic
Discharge” chapter in Regulatory and Safety Notices on the
Notebook Documentation CD.
■ Excessive force can damage drive connectors. When you insert a
drive, use only enough force to seat the drive.
■ Handle a drive carefully. Do not drop it.
■ Avoid exposing a hard drive or a diskette to devices with magnetic
fields. Products with magnetic fields include video and audio tape
erasure products, monitors, and speakers. Security devices with
magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security
wands. The airport security devices that check carry-on luggage,
usually while it is placed on a conveyor belt, use x-rays instead of
magnetism and will not damage a hard drive or a diskette.
■ Do not spray a drive with cleaners.
■ Avoid exposing a drive to liquids or temperature extremes.
■ If you mail a drive, ship it in packaging that protects it from shock,
vibration, extreme temperatures, and high humidity. Label the
package “FRAGILE.”
7–13
Replacing the Internal Hard Drive
The hard drive in the hard drive bay is the internal hard drive.
Remove the internal hard drive only for repair or replacement.
Ä
CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and loss of work, do not
begin this procedure until you
■ Save your work, close all open applications, and shut down the
notebook. If you are unsure whether the notebook is off or in
hibernation, turn the notebook on and then shut it down through the
operating system.
■ Disconnect all external devices connected to the notebook.
■ Disconnect the notebook from external power and remove the
battery pack.
For battery pack removal instructions, see the “Replacing a
Battery Pack” section in Chapter 3, “Power.”
To replace the internal hard drive:
2. Loosen the 2 hard drive security screws.
7–14
3. To remove the hard drive cover and expose the hard drive tab,
lift the cover 1 upward and away from the notebook 2.
4. To remove the hard drive, pull upward on the hard drive tab 1
to release the hard drive, and then lift the hard drive 2 out of
the hard drive bay.
7–15
5. To insert the replacement hard drive, tilt the connector edge
of the hard drive 1 downward, and then lower the hard drive
into the hard drive bay until it is seated 2.
7–16
6. Replace the hard drive cover.
a. Place the cover over the hard drive bay.
b. Slide the cover 1 slightly toward the right side of the
notebook until the cover is seated 2.
7–17
7. Tighten the 2 hard drive security screws.
7–18
Memory
The notebook has 2 memory slots. Depending on your notebook
model, either one or both memory slots might contain a
replaceable memory module.
Increasing Memory
You can increase the amount of RAM (random access memory)
in the notebook by adding memory modules to vacant memory
slots or by replacing installed memory modules.
When RAM is increased, the operating system increases the
hard drive space reserved for the hibernation file. Before you
increase RAM, it is recommended that you verify that your hard
drive has enough free space for the larger hibernation file.
■
To display the amount of RAM in the system:
Select Start > Help and Support.
■
To display both the amount of free space on your hard drive
and the amount of space required by the hibernation file:
Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and
Maintenance > Power Options > Hibernate tab.
7–19
Removing or Inserting a Memory Module
Å
WARNING: To prevent exposure to electrical shock, access only the
memory compartment during this procedure. The memory compartment,
the battery bay, and the hard drive bay are the only user-accessible
internal compartments on the notebook. All other areas that require a
tool to access should be opened only by a service partner.
Å
WARNING: To prevent exposure to electrical shock and damage to
the notebook, shut down the notebook, unplug the power cord, and
remove the battery pack before installing a memory module.
Ä
CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic
components: before beginning this procedure, discharge yourself of
static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. For more
information about preventing electrostatic damage, refer to the
“Electrostatic Discharge” chapter in Regulatory and Safety Notices on
the Notebook Documentation CD.
1. Save your work and close all open applications.
2. Shut down the notebook.
If you are unsure whether the notebook is off or in
hibernation, turn the notebook on and then shut it down
through the operating system.
3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the notebook.
4. Disconnect the notebook from external power.
5. Remove the battery pack.
For instructions, see the “Replacing a Battery Pack” section
in Chapter 3, “Power.”
7–20
7. Loosen the 2 memory compartment screws 1, and then lift
up and remove the memory compartment cover 2.
7–21
8. Remove a memory module.
To remove a memory module:
a. Pull away the retention clips on each side of the
module 1. (The module tilts upward.)
b. Grasp the edges of the module and gently pull the module
out of the memory slot 2.
c. To protect a memory module after removal, place it in an
electrostatic-safe container.
7–22
To insert a memory module:
a. Align the keyed (notched) edge of the module with the
keyed area in the memory slot 1.
If you are inserting a single memory module into a vacant
memory compartment, insert the module into the right
slot. (The following illustration shows a memory module
being inserted into the right slot of a memory
compartment that contains a second memory module.)
b. With the module at a 45-degree angle from the surface
of the memory compartment, press the module into the
memory slot until it is seated 2.
c. Push the module downward until the retention clips snap
into place 3.
7–23
9. To close the memory compartment, align the tabs on the
memory compartment cover with the cover slots on
the notebook, and then slide the cover over the memory
compartment until it is seated 1.
10. Tighten the 2 memory compartment screws 2.
11. Replace the battery pack, reconnect the notebook to external
power, and then restart the notebook.
7–24
8
Software Updates and
Recoveries and System
Software
Software Updates
For optimal notebook performance and to make sure your
notebook remains compatible with changing technologies, install
the latest versions of the software provided with your notebook as
they become available.
As with any other software modification, it is strongly
recommended that you set a restore point before beginning a
software update. For instructions, see “Using System Restore”
later in this chapter.
You might find that the easiest way to update the software
provided with your notebook is to use the software update links
provided at Start > Help and Support.
If you prefer to work from more detailed instructions, the
supplementary information in the following sections might help
you to
■
Prepare for any update by identifying your notebook
category, product name, product number, and serial number.
■
Prepare for a ROM (read-only memory) update by identifying
the ROM version currently installed on the notebook.
■
Access updates at the http://www.hp.com/support Web site.
■
Download and install updates.
8–1
Software Updates and Recoveries and System Software
Preparing for a Software Update
If your notebook connects to a network, consult with your
network administrator before installing any software updates,
particularly a ROM update.
Accessing Notebook Product Information
To access the updates for your notebook, you might need the
following information:
■
The product category is Notebook.
■
The product name, product number (P/N), and serial number
(S/N) are provided on the Service Tag. The information on
the Service Tag is provided at Start > Help and Support,
and on the Service Tag label affixed to the bottom of the
notebook.
Accessing Notebook ROM Information
To determine whether an available ROM update is a later
ROM version than the ROM version currently installed on the
notebook, you need to know the version of the currently
installed ROM.
»
To display ROM information from within Windows, press
the fn+esc hotkey. In the fn+esc display, the version of the
system ROM is displayed as the BIOS (basic input-output
system) date. On some notebook models, the BIOS date is
displayed in decimal format. To clear the display, press esc.
ROM information can also be displayed in the Setup utility.
The procedure for displaying ROM information is described in
this section. For more information about using the Setup utility,
see the “Setup Utility” section later in this chapter.
8–2
To display ROM information in the Setup utility:
1. To open the Setup utility, turn on or restart the notebook in
Windows, and then press f10 while the prompt “Press <F10>
to enter setup” is displayed in the lower left corner of the
screen.
2. If the Setup utility does not open with system information
displayed, use the arrow keys to select the Main menu.
(When the Main menu is selected, ROM and other system
information is displayed.)
3. To close the Setup utility without changing any settings, use
the arrow keys to select the Exit menu > Exit Discarding
Changes, and then press enter. (The notebook restarts in
Windows.)
Downloading and Installing an Update
Most software at the http://www.hp.com/support Web site is packaged
in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some ROM updates might be
packaged in compressed files called ROMPaqs.
Most download packages contain a file named Readme.txt.
A Readme.txt file contains detailed descriptive, installation,
and troubleshooting information about the download. The
Readme.txt files included with ROMPaqs are in English only.
The following sections provide instructions for downloading
and installing
■
A ROM update.
■
A SoftPaq containing an update other than a ROM update;
for example, an application update.
8–3
Downloading and Installing a ROM Update
Ä
CAUTION: To prevent serious damage to the notebook or an unsuccessful
installation, download and install a ROM update only while the notebook
is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. (Do not
download or install a ROM update while the notebook is docked in an
optional Expansion Base or running on battery power.) During the
download and installation:
■ Do not unplug the notebook from the AC outlet.
■ Do not shut down the notebook or initiate standby or hibernation.
■ Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable,
or cord.
Downloading a ROM Update:
1. Access the page at the http://www.hp.com/support Web site that
provides software for your notebook.
2. Select Start > Help and Support, and then select a software
update link.
3. Follow the instructions on the screen to identify your
notebook and access the ROM update you want to download.
4. At the download area:
a. Record the date, name, or other identifier of any ROM
update that is later than the ROM currently installed on your
notebook. (You might need this information to locate the
update later, after it has been downloaded to the hard drive.)
b. Record the path to the default or custom location on the
hard drive to which the ROM package will download.
(You might need to access the ROM package after it has
been downloaded.)
c. Follow the online instructions to download your selection
to the hard drive.
8–4
Installing a ROM Update
ROM installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that
are displayed on the screen after the download is complete. If no
instructions are displayed:
1. Open Windows Explorer. To open Windows Explorer
from the Start button, select Start > All Programs >
Accessories > Windows Explorer.
2. In the left pane of the Windows Explorer window,
select My Computer > your hard drive designation.
(The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk C.)
Then follow the path you recorded earlier to the folder on
your hard drive containing the update.
3. To begin the installation, open the folder, and then
double-click the file with an .exe extension—for example,
Filename.exe. (The ROM update installation begins.)
4. To complete the installation, follow the instructions on the
screen.
a message on the screen reports a successful installation,
✎ After
you can delete the downloaded file from the destination folder.
Downloading and Installing a
Non-ROM SoftPaq
To update software other than the ROM:
1. Access the page at the http://www.hp.com/support Web site that
provides software for your notebook.
2. Select Start > Help and Support, and then select a software
update link.
3. Follow the instructions on the screen to identify your
notebook and access the SoftPaq you want to download.
8–5
4. At the download area:
a. Write down the date, name, or other identifier of the
SoftPaq you plan to download. (You might need this
information to locate the update later, after it has been
downloaded to the hard drive.)
b. Follow the online instructions to download the SoftPaq
to the hard drive.
5. When the download is complete, open Windows Explorer.
To open Windows Explorer from the Start button, select
Start > All Programs > Accessories > Windows Explorer.
6. In the left pane of the Windows Explorer window, select
My Computer > your hard drive designation (which is
typically Local Disk C) > SWSetup.
The destination folder for most downloads from the
http://www.hp.com/support Web site is the SWSetup folder. If
you don’t see the download in the SWSetup folder, look in
the My Documents folder.
7. In the destination folder, select the name or number of the
software package you have downloaded.
8. Select the file that includes an .exe extension—for example,
Filename.exe. (The installation begins.)
9. To complete the installation, follow the instructions on the
screen.
a message on the screen reports a successful installation,
✎ After
you can delete the downloaded file from the destination folder.
8–6
Software Recoveries
Using System Restore
System Restore is an operating system feature that enables you
to undo harmful changes to your notebook software by restoring
your software to an earlier time, called a restore point, when your
software was functioning optimally.
Restore points are restorable, benchmark “snapshots” of your
application, driver, and operating system files. The notebook sets
restore points at regular intervals and might set additional restore
points whenever you change your personal settings or add
software or hardware.
Manually setting additional restore points provides additional
protection for your system files and settings. It is recommended
that you manually set restore points
■
Before you add or extensively modify software or hardware.
■
Periodically, whenever the system is performing optimally.
Restoring to any restore point does not affect your data files.
For example, restoring your system software to an earlier time
will not affect documents or e-mails that you saved after that
time. All System Restore procedures are reversible.
8–7
Setting a Restore Point
To set a system restore point manually:
1. Select Start > Help and Support > System Restore.
2. Select Create a restore point, and then follow the
instructions on the screen.
Restoring to a Restore Point
To restore the notebook to a restore point:
1. Make sure the notebook is connected to reliable external
power through the AC adapter.
2. Select Start > Help and Support > System Restore.
3. Select Restore my computer to an earlier time, and then
follow the instructions on the screen.
Repairing or Reinstalling Software
If it ever becomes necessary to repair or reinstall your device
drivers, an application, or your operating system, refer to
Appendix B, “System Restore,” in the Getting Started guide.
8–8
Quick Launch Buttons Control Panel
You can use the Quick Launch Buttons control panel to
■
Set preferences for the display of the Quick Launch
Buttons icon.
■
Change the size and arrangement of icons and text on your
Windows desktop.
■
Display hotkeys information.
■
Set button assignments for the Easy Access buttons on an
optional external keyboard.
The following sections provide instructions for setting
preferences within the control panel. For additional onscreen
information about any item on the control panel, select the
help button in the upper-right corner of the window. The help
button is identified with a question mark icon.
Accessing the Quick Launch Buttons
Control Panel
You can access the Quick Launch Buttons control panel from the
Start button or from an icon that you can display in the
notification area or Windows desktop.
»
To access the Quick Launch Buttons control panel from the
Start button, select Start > Control Panel > Quick Launch
Buttons.
8–9
Setting Windows Desktop Icon Display
Preferences
To change the size of the icons on your desktop and of the text
displayed with them:
1. Open the Quick Launch Buttons control panel:
❏ Select Start > Control Panel > Quick Launch Buttons.
- or ❏ Select the Quick Launch Buttons icon in the notification
area or Windows desktop.
2. Select the Zoom tab.
3. Adjust the slider toward the left and right until your icon
display preference is displayed in the illustration above the
slider.
4. To save your preference and close the display, select OK.
If you select a very large icon display and have set your operating
system to Auto Arrange the icons on your Windows desktop, the
icons might overlap.
To clear the Auto Arrange setting:
1. Right-click an open area on your Windows desktop.
2. Select Arrange Icons By.
3. Select Auto Arrange to remove the check and disable
Auto Arrange.
8–10
Displaying the Quick Launch Buttons Icon
To show or hide the Quick Launch Buttons Properties icon in the
notification area or your Windows desktop:
2. Select the Advanced tab. On the Advanced tab you can
❏ Display or hide the Quick Launch Buttons icon in the
notification area.
◆
To display the icon, select the Show icon on the
taskbar check box.
◆
To hide the icon, clear the Show icon on the taskbar
check box.
❏ Display or hide the Quick Launch Buttons icon on your
Windows desktop.
◆
To display the icon, select the Show icon on the
desktop check box.
◆
To hide the icon, clear the Show icon on the desktop
check box.
3. To save your preferences and close the display, select OK.
8–11
Displaying Hotkey Information
A hotkey is a preset combination of the fn key and another key,
such as a function key (f1 through f12) or the esc key.
To display information about the hotkey functions available on
your notebook:
2. Select the Function Keys tab.
3. To close the display, select OK.
For more information about hotkeys, see the “Hotkeys” section in
Chapter 2, “TouchPad and Keyboard.”
8–12
Setting Button Assignments on an
External Keyboard
If you are using an optional external keyboard that features
Easy Access buttons, you can set Easy Access button assignments
and schemes on the Settings tab.
The Settings tab is disabled and hidden by default. To display and
enable the Settings tab in the Quick Launch Buttons control
panel:
2. Select the Advanced tab. Then
❏ To display and enable the Settings tab, select the check
box for Allow users to modify button assignments on
external keyboard.
❏ To disable and hide the Settings tab, clear the check box
for Allow users to modify button assignments on
external keyboard.
3. To save your preferences and close the display, select OK.
For information about managing Easy Access button assignments
and schemes, refer to your keyboard documentation.
8–13
Setup Utility
The Setup utility is a ROM-based information and customization
utility that can be used even when your operating system is not
working or will not load.
The utility reports information about the notebook and provides
settings for startup, security, and other preferences.
Step-by-step instructions for setting specific preferences are
included by topic earlier in this guide. For example, procedures
for setting password and other security preferences are provided
in Chapter 6, “Security.”
Opening the Setup Utility
To open the Setup Utility:
1. Turn on or restart the notebook in Windows.
2. Before Windows opens and while the “Press <F10> to enter
setup” prompt is displayed in the lower left corner of the
screen, press f10.
8–14
Changing the Language of the Setup Utility
The following procedure explains how to change the language of
the Setup utility. If the notebook is not in the Setup utility, begin
at step 1. If the notebook is in the Setup utility, begin at step 2.
screen.
2. Use the arrow keys to select the Advanced menu.
3. Press f5 or f6 (or use the arrow keys) to select a language, and
then press enter.
4. When a confirmation prompt with your preference selected is
displayed, press enter to save your preference.
5. To set your preferences and exit the Setup utility, press f10,
Your preferences are in effect when the notebook restarts in
Windows.
Navigating and Selecting in the Setup Utility
Because the Setup utility is not Windows-based, it does not
support the TouchPad. Navigation and selection are by keystroke.
■
To choose a menu or a menu item, use the arrow keys.
■
To choose an item in a drop-down list or to toggle a field,
for example an Enable/Disable field, use either the arrow
keys or f5 or f6.
■
To select an item, press enter.
■
To close a text box or return to the menu display, press esc.
To display additional navigation and selection information while
the Setup utility is open, press f1.
8–15
Displaying System Information
The following procedure explains how to display system
information in the Setup utility. If the Setup utility is not open,
begin at step 1. If the Setup utility is open, begin at step 2.
screen.
2. Access the system information on the Main and Advanced
menus.
❏ To display most of the system information available in the
Setup utility, use the arrow keys to select the Main menu.
❏ To display video memory information, use the arrow keys
to select the Advanced menu.
3. To close the Setup utility without changing any settings, use
the arrow keys to select the Exit menu > Exit Discarding
Changes, and then press enter. (The notebook restarts in
Windows.)
8–16
Restoring Default Settings in the
Setup Utility
The following procedure explains how to restore the Setup utility
default settings. If the notebook is not in the Setup utility, begin at
step 1. If the notebook is in the Setup utility, begin at step 2.
Windows, and then press f10 while the prompt “Press <F10> to
enter setup” is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen.
2. Press f10.
3. When the Setup Confirmation is displayed, press enter to save
your preferences.
4. To set your preferences and exit the Setup utility, press f10,
The Setup utility default settings are set when you exit the Setup
utility and are in effect when the notebook restarts. Identification
information, including ROM version information, is retained.
8–17
Using Advanced Setup Utility Features
This guide describes the Setup utility features recommended for
all users. For more information about the Setup utility features
recommended for advanced users only, refer to the Help and
Support Center by selecting Start > Help and Support.
The Setup utility features available for advanced users include
a hard drive self-test, a Network Service Boot, and settings for
boot order preferences.
The “<F12> to boot from LAN” message that is displayed in the
lower-left corner of the screen each time the notebook is started
or restarted in Windows or restored from hibernation is the
prompt for a Network Service Boot.
The “Press <ESC> to change boot order” message that is
displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen each time the
notebook is started or restarted in Windows or restored from
hibernation is the prompt to change the boot order.
8–18
Closing the Setup Utility
You can close the Setup utility with or without saving changes.
■
To close the Setup utility and save your changes from the
current session, use either of the following procedures:
❏ Press f10, and then follow the instructions on the screen.
- or ❏ If the Setup utility menus are not visible, press esc to
return to the menu display. Then use arrow keys to
select the Exit menu > Exit Saving Changes, and then
press enter.
When you use the f10 procedure, you are offered an option
to return to the Setup utility. When you use the Exit Saving
Changes procedure, the Setup utility closes when you press
enter.
■
To close the Setup utility without saving your changes from
the current session:
If the Setup utility menus are not visible, press esc to return
to the menu display. Then use arrow keys to select the
Exit menu > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter.
After the Setup utility closes, the notebook restarts in Windows.
8–19
A
Specifications
Operating Environment
The operating environment information in the following table
might be helpful if you plan to use or transport the notebook in
extreme environments.
Factor
Metric
U.S.
Operating
10°C to 35°C
50°F to 95°F
Nonoperating
-20°C to 60°C
-4°F to 140°F
Temperature
Relative humidity (noncondensing)
Operating
10% to 90%
10% to 90%
Nonoperating
5% to 95%
5% to 95%
Maximum altitude (unpressurized)
Operating
-15 m to 3,048 m
Nonoperating
-15 m to 12,192 m -50 ft to 40,000 ft
-50 ft to 10,000 ft
A–1
Specifications
Rated Input Power
The power information in this section might be helpful if you
plan to travel internationally with the notebook.
The notebook operates on DC power, which can be supplied by
an AC or a DC power source. Although the notebook can be
powered from a stand-alone DC power source, it is strongly that
the notebook be powered only with an AC adapter or DC power
cord supplied with or approved for an HP notebook.
The notebook is capable of accepting DC power within the
following specifications.
Input Power
Rating
Operating voltage
18.5V dc @ 3.5 A - 65 W
Operating current
3.5 A
This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with
phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 230 Vrms.
A–2
Specifications
Expansion Port Input/Output Signals
The expansion port signal information in this section might be
helpful if you plan to use an optional expansion product that
connects to the expansion port on your notebook.
This port is illustrated in the “Left-Side Components” section
of Chapter 1, “Hardware.”
Optional expansion products that connect to the notebook
through the expansion port might include an Expansion Base
or an HP xc2000 Notebook All-in-One Media Cable.
The following table identifies the input and output signals
supported by the expansion port on your notebook.
Feature
Support
USB 2.0
Yes
10/100 Ethernet
Yes
Gigabit Ethernet
No
IEEE 1394 (4-pin port)
Yes
Consumer IR (for optional remote control only)
Yes
Power inputs
65 W
Composite TV
Yes
S-Video TV
Yes
Component TV
No
S/PDIF audio
Yes
DVI
No
Headphone/speaker audio-out
Yes
Microphone audio-in
Yes
A–3
Index
1394 port 1–15, 7–3
6-in-1 Digital Media Reader
light 1–15
slot 1–15, 7–5
A
AC adapter 1–19
AC power vs. battery power
3–1
administrator password 6–5
airport security devices 7–13
altitude specifications A–1
antennae 1–8
antivirus software 6–13
application recovery disc 1–20
applications key, Windows
1–2
applications, reinstalling or
repairing 1–20
applications. See software
audio-in (microphone) jack
1–11, 4–4
audio-out (headphone) jack
1–11, 4–3
Auto/Air/AC Adapter 3–2,
3–14
Automobile Power
Adapter/Charger 3–2, 3–14
AutoPlay 4–10
B
base, docking. See Expansion
Base
battery bay 1–18, 1–21
battery light
displaying charge status
3–15, 3–17
identifying 1–10, 3–4
battery pack
battery power vs. AC
power 3–1
calibrating 3–19
charging 3–14
conserving power 3–23
diagnostic information
8–16
disposing of 3–27
inserting 3–26
low-battery conditions
3–17
monitoring charge 3–15
removing 3–25
storing 3–27
Index–1
Index
battery pack release latch
1–18, 3–25
bays
battery 1–18, 1–21
hard drive 1–18
See also compartments
BIOS information, displaying
6–2, 8–2
Bluetooth device, wireless
light 1–6, 1–9
Bluetooth label 1–21
boot order 8–18
buttons
display release 1–11
Easy Access 8–13
mute 1–7, 4–2
PC Card eject 1–14, 7–11
power 1–4, 3–8, 3–12
TouchPad 1–3
volume 1–7, 4–2
wireless 1–6, 1–7
See also battery pack
release latch; display
switch; keys
C
cable lock, security 6–16
cables
audio 4–5
HP xc2000 Notebook
All-in-One Media Cable
2–9
modem 1–19
network 1–13
S-Video 4–5
See also power cord
Index–2
calibration, battery 3–19
camcorder
connecting 7–3
digital memory cards 7–5
camera
connecting 7–3
digital memory cards 7–5
caps lock light 1–5
card and socket services,
PC Card 7–9
card. See digital memory
cards; memory; PC Card
category view, Windows XP
2–3
CDs
audio, hotkeys 4–9
copying 4–12
copyright warning 4–12
creating 4–12
inserting, removing 4–8
multimedia applications
4–16
playing 4–9, 4–11, 4–15
setting AutoPlay
preferences 4–10
writing to 4–12
See also recovery discs
Certificate of Authenticity
label 1–21
classic view, Windows 2–3
Compaq administrator
password 6–5
compartments
memory 1–17, 7–19
Mini PCI 1–17
See also bays
Index
composite video 2–9
Computer Setup, setting
security preferences 6–3
connectors
drive 7–13
power 1–13
See also jacks; ports
conservation, power 3–23
cord, power
identifying 1–19
See also cables
country-specific modem
adapter 1–19
critical low-battery condition
3–17
D
default settings, restoring
Setup utility 8–17
desktop, Windows, setting
icon display preferences
8–10
device disabling 6–12
device security 6–12
device, connecting powered
7–1
digital memory cards
6-in-1 Digital Media
Reader 7–5
inserting 7–7
removing 7–8
setting AutoPlay
preferences 4–10
types supported 7–5
disc, optical. See CDs; DVDs
diskette
affected by airport security
7–13
protecting playback 3–7
display release button 1–11
display switch
setting preferences 3–12
display, internal
controlling brightness 2–11
switching image 2–9
driver recovery disc 1–20
drivers, reinstalling or
repairing 1–20
drives
adding to system 7–12
7–13
avoiding standby and
hibernation while using
discs, diskettes 3–7, 4–11
boot order 8–18
caring for 7–13
IDE drive light 7–12
shipping 7–13
USB 7–2
See also CDs; DVDs; hard
drive
DVDs
changing regional settings
4–13
creating 4–17
hotkeys 4–9
4–16
Index–3
Index
playing 4–9, 4–11, 4–15
setting AutoPlay
preferences 4–10
writing to 4–12
See recovery discs
E
Easy Access buttons 8–13
eject buttons
optical drive 4–8
PC Card 7–11
electrostatic discharge (ESD)
7–13, 7–20
emergency shutdown
procedures 3–11
enablers, PC Card 7–9
environmental specifications
A–1, A–2
ESD (electrostatic discharge)
7–13, 7–20
exhaust vent 1–12, 1–18
Expansion Base
as power source 3–2
docking, undocking while
using disc, diskette 4–11
expansion port on notebook
1–13
monitor port 2–9
USB support 7–2
expansion port 1–13, A–3
external numeric keypad 2–17
F
F12 to boot from LAN
message 8–18
firewall software 6–15
flash memory cards 7–5
Index–4
fn key 1–2
function keys (f1, f2, etc.) 2–5
G
Getting Started 1–20
H
hard drive
7–13
displaying amount of free
space on 7–19
replacing internal 7–14
self-test 8–18
space on, required for
hibernation file 7–19
hard drive bay
identifying 1–18
replacing hard drive 7–14
headphone (audio-out) jack
1–11, 4–3
headphones 4–3
Help and Support Center 2–7
hibernation
avoiding when using discs,
diskettes 3–7, 4–11
defined 3–6
enabling/disabling 3–6
identifying 7–14
initiated during critical
low-battery condition
3–17
initiating 3–10
restoring from 3–6, 3–10
when to use 3–6
hibernation file 3–6, 7–19
Index
hotkey commands
access Help and Support
Center 2–7
control media activity
(play, pause, stop, etc.)
2–12, 4–9, 8–2
decrease display brightness
2–11
display system information
2–13
increase display brightness
2–11
initiate QuickLock 2–11
initiate standby 3–9, 3–12
open Internet Explorer 2–8
open print options window
2–8
Quick Reference 2–6
switch image 2–9
hotkeys
displaying functions on the
screen 8–12
procedures 2–7
Quick Reference 2–6
using with external
keyboard 2–7
HP administrator password
6–5
HP password 6–5
HP password guidelines 6–6
HP xc2000 Notebook
All-in-One Media Cable 2–9
hub, USB 7–2
humidity specifications A–1
I
icons on Windows desktop,
setting display preferences
8–10
IDE drive light 1–10, 7–12
identifying components
bottom 1–17
front 1–9
left-side 1–12
rear 1–12
right-side 1–15
top 1–1
IEEE 1394 port 1–15, 7–3
Internet Connection wizard
2–8
Internet Explorer 2–8
InterVideo WinDVD Creator
4–16
InterVideo WinDVD Player
4–14, 4–16
J
jacks
audio-in (microphone)
1–11, 4–4
audio-out (headphone)
1–11, 4–3
RJ-11 (modem) 1–13
RJ-45 (network) 1–13
S-Video–out 1–16, 4–5
See also connectors; ports
K
keyboard, external 2–7, 8–13
keypad, embedded numeric
procedures 2–15
Index–5
Index
keypad, external numeric,
procedures 2–17
keys
fn 1–2
function (f1, f2, etc.) 1–1
hotkeys 1–1, 2–5
keypad 1–2, 2–14
num lock 2–15
scroll lock 2–7
shift 2–16, 3–10
Windows applications 1–2
Windows logo 1–1
See also buttons; display
switch
L
labels
Bluetooth 1–21
Microsoft Certificate of
Authenticity 1–21
Modem Approval 1–21
Regulatory 1–21
Service Tag 1–21
wireless certification 1–21
WLAN 1–21
language, changing in Setup
utility 8–15
latch, battery pack release
1–18
See also buttons; display
switch
lights
Reader 1–15
battery 1–10, 3–15, 3–17
caps lock 1–5
Index–6
IDE drive 1–10, 7–12
mute 1–5, 4–2
num lock 1–6, 2–15
power/standby 1–9, 3–8
power/standby button 1–5
TouchPad 2–1
wireless 1–9
wireless button 1–6
lock, security cable 1–16,
6–16
lock-up, system 3–11
low-battery condition 3–17
M
Media Player, Windows 4–16
media, digital 7–5
memory
displaying amount of 2–7,
7–19
increasing RAM 7–19
memory card reader 7–5
memory compartment 1–17,
7–21
memory module, removing or
inserting 7–20
Memory Reader light 7–6
Memory Reader slot 7–6
Memory Stick, Memory Stick
Pro 7–5
microphone 4–4
microphone (audio-in) jack
1–11, 4–4
Authenticity label 1–21
Mini PCI compartment 1–17
Index
model, identifying notebook
2–7, 8–2
modem
country-specific adapter
1–19
documentation 7–4
modem (RJ-11) jack 1–13
Modem Approval label 1–21
modem cable 1–19
monitor
connecting 7–1
switching image 2–9, 7–1
monitor port 1–13
mouse, external
USB 7–2
MultiMediaCard 7–5
mute button 1–7, 4–2
mute light 1–5, 4–2
N
network (RJ-45) jack 1–13
network cable 1–13
network documentation 7–4
Network Service Boot 8–18
Norton AntiVirus 6–13
notebook model, family, type,
and serial number 2–7, 8–2
num lock key 2–15
num lock light 1–6, 2–15
numeric keypad. See keypad,
external numeric; keypad,
embedded numeric
O
operating environment
specifications A–1
operating system
2–8
loading 3–8
Authenticity label 1–21
passwords 6–5
Product Key 1–21
security 6–2
shutting down 3–8, 3–11
operating system recovery disc
1–20
operating system, Windows
reinstalling or repairing
1–20
optical disc. See CDs; DVDs
optical drive
identifying 1–15
inserting, removing disc
4–8
See also CDs; drives;
DVDs
P
passwords
forgetting 6–4
HP 6–5
HP guidelines 6–6
power-on 6–10
QuickLock 2–11
standby 3–12
Index–7
Index
using 6–4
Windows 6–5
Windows administrator
2–11
Windows guidelines 6–6
Windows user 2–11
passwords, coordinating 6–6
PC Card
configuring 7–9
stopping 7–11
types supported 7–9
PC Card eject button 1–14,
7–11
PC Card slot 1–14, 7–10
PCFriendly 4–15
pointing device 2–2
ports
1394 1–15, 7–3
expansion port 1–13
external monitor 1–13, 2–9
USB 1–13, 1–15, 7–2
See also connectors; jacks
power
conserving 3–6, 3–23
control and light locations
3–4
schemes 3–12
sources 3–1
switching between AC and
battery 3–3
See also battery pack;
hibernation; shutdown
procedures; standby
power connector 1–13
Index–8
power cord
external device 7–19
notebook 1–19
See also cables
Power Meter icon 3–3, 3–16
power/standby button
default functions 3–8
resetting notebook with
3–11
power/standby light 1–5, 1–9,
3–8
powered device, connecting
7–1
power-on password 6–5
Press ESC to change boot
order message 8–18
Product Key 1–21
product name and number,
notebook 1–21, 2–7
projector
connecting 1–13, 7–1
switching image 2–9
PXE server 7–4
Q
QuickLock 2–11
QuickLock hotkey 6–3
R
RAM (random access
memory) 7–19
reader, memory card 7–5
recovery discs 1–20
regional settings for DVDs
4–13
Index
regulatory information
Modem Approval label
1–21
Regulatory label 1–21
wireless certification labels
1–21
software 1–20
release latch, battery pack
1–18, 3–25
reset (emergency shutdown
procedures) 3–11
restore point 8–7
RJ-11 (modem) jack 1–13
RJ-45 (network) jack 1–13
ROM
determining current
version of 8–2
downloading and installing
8–4
obtaining updates 8–3
ROMPaq 8–3
S
scanner 7–3
screen saver 3–24
scroll lock key 2–7
scrolling regions, TouchPad
1–3, 2–2
Secure Digital (SD) Memory
Card 7–5
security cable lock, connecting
6–16
security cable slot 1–16
security features 6–1
security features on notebook
6–3
serial number, notebook 1–21,
2–7
series, notebook 8–2
Service Tag 1–21
Setup utility
changing language 8–15
displaying system
information 8–16
navigation and selection
8–15
Network Service Boot 7–4,
8–18
opening 8–14
restoring default settings
8–15, 8–17
setting security preferences
6–3
shift key
embedded numeric keypad
function 2–16
hibernation function 3–10
shutdown procedures 3–8
7–5
slot 7–6
sleep button 2–10
Sleep. See standby
slots
Reader 1–15, 7–5
memory 7–19
PC Card 1–14
security cable 1–16
Index–9
Index
SmartMedia (SM) card 7–5
socket services, PC Card 7–9
SoftPaq 8–3, 8–5
software
antivirus 6–13
AutoPlay 4–10
firewall 6–2, 6–15
2–8
4–13, 4–15
Power Meter 3–16
1–20
repair, reinstallation
documentation 8–8
ROMPaq 8–3
security features 6–1
Setup utility 8–14
SoftPaq 8–3
System Restore 8–7
updating 8–1
Sonic RecordNow! 4–14,
4–16
speakers
external 4–3
internal 1–11, 4–1
specifications
operating environment A–1
rated input power A–2
standby
avoiding when using discs,
diskettes 3–7, 4–11
initiated during critical
low-battery condition
3–17
Index–10
initiating 3–9
password 3–12
power/standby light 1–5,
1–9
resuming from 3–9
stereo speakers
external 4–3
internal 1–11, 4–1
S-Video–out jack 1–16, 4–5
switch, display
system information,
displaying 8–2, 8–16
system lock-up 3–11
System Restore 8–7
T
telephone jack (RJ-11 jack)
1–13
television
connecting audio 4–3
connecting video 4–6
temperature
storage, battery pack 3–27
1394 port 1–15, 7–3
TouchPad 1–3, 2–1
traveling with notebook
battery pack temperature
considerations 3–27
environmental
Index
Modem Approval label
1–21
wireless certification labels
1–21
turning off notebook 3–8,
3–11
turning on notebook 3–8
tutorials 2–7, 4–15, 7–4
U
unresponsive system,
emergency shutdown
procedures 3–11
USB devices, connecting 7–2
USB ports, identifying 1–13,
1–15
user passwords 6–5
V
VCR
connecting audio 4–3
connecting video 4–5
vents, exhaust 1–12, 1–18
video device
connecting 4–5, 7–1
turning on or off 4–7
viruses, antivirus software
6–13
volume buttons 1–7
volume, adjusting 4–2
W
Windows applications key 1–2
Windows category vs.
Windows classic view 2–3
Windows desktop, setting icon
display preferences 8–10
Windows firewall 6–2
Windows logo key 1–1
Windows Media Player 4–16
Windows MovieMaker 4–16
Windows password guidelines
6–6
WinDVD Creator 4–16
WinDVD Player 4–16
wireless
types of WLAN adapters
5–7
wireless local area network
(WLAN) 5–7
WLAN software 5–8
wireless button 1–7, 5–11
wireless certification label
1–21
wireless device antennae 1–8
wireless device documentation
7–4
wireless LAN device
Mini PCI compartment
1–17
wireless light 1–6, 1–9
wireless light 1–6, 1–9
WLAN
identifying devices 5–7
software 5–8
troubleshooting 5–8
types 5–7
WLAN label 1–21
X
xD-Picture Card 7–5
Index–11
Bluetooth wireless technology basics
Abstract.............................................................................................................................................. 2
Introduction......................................................................................................................................... 2
How Bluetooth wireless technology works ............................................................................................... 3
BWT network topologies ................................................................................................................... 4
BWT security ................................................................................................................................... 5
Establishing BWT connections ............................................................................................................... 6
Activating BWT devices .................................................................................................................... 6
Notebook PCs.............................................................................................................................. 6
iPAQ Pocket PCs .......................................................................................................................... 8
Printers........................................................................................................................................ 8
Cellular phones ............................................................................................................................ 8
Selecting BWT device profiles ........................................................................................................... 8
Pairing.......................................................................................................................................... 10
Summary .......................................................................................................................................... 10
For more information.......................................................................................................................... 11
Abstract
This paper provides an overview of Bluetooth® wireless technology and instructs users on how to
establish Bluetooth connections using HP products. Bluetooth wireless technology is an inexpensive,
short-range radio technology that eliminates the need for proprietary cabling between devices such
as notebook PCs, handheld PCs, personal digital assistants (PDAs), cameras, and printers.
Introduction
Bluetooth wireless technology (BWT) was developed in 1994 at Ericsson in Sweden. The original
purpose of BWT was to eliminate the need for proprietary cable connections between devices such
as PDAs and notebook PCs. Although infrared communication existed at the time, it required line-ofsight contact. Therefore, Ericsson chose to use an inexpensive, low-power radio built into each device,
making it possible to wirelessly connect devices through walls and other nonmetallic materials. After
Ericsson began work on BWT, the concept blossomed into a radio technology that simultaneously
connects several devices in a wireless personal area network (WPAN).
Because of the unlimited potential of BWT, the Bluetooth Special Interest Group (SIG)1 was formed
in 1998 to develop the Bluetooth Specification IEEE 802.15. The specification standardized the
development of BWT-enabled devices so that devices from different manufacturers can work together.
What does this mean for you? With BWT, you can run your presentation on a client's BWT-enabled
projector without a cable connection. If you leave a file on the desktop PC back at your office, don't
fret. Use your BWT-enabled PDA or laptop to connect to your office LAN via your BWT-enabled
mobile phone—without taking the phone out of your briefcase. Exchange electronic business cards
with everyone in the room, regardless of where they are sitting, with a few taps on your PDA. Then,
the PDA saves you time by automatically synchronizing their contact information with the email
application on your laptop. These BWT-enabled products are available today.
This paper provides an overview of BWT, describes the requirements for establishing a
BWT connection, and provides information about HP products that incorporate BWT.
Where did the name Bluetooth come from?
The Bluetooth SIG adopted the code name as a tribute to the
tenth-century Viking king Harald Blåtand who peacefully united
Denmark and Norway. Harald liked to eat blueberries, which
gave his teeth the coloration that lead to the nickname "Bluetooth."
1
The founding members of the Bluetooth SIG are Ericsson, Intel, IBM, Nokia, and Toshiba. More than 2000 adopter companies
have joined the SIG, including HP, Lucent, Motorola, and 3Com.
2
How Bluetooth wireless technology works
BWT-enabled devices operate in the unrestricted 2.4-gigahertz (GHz) Industrial, Science,
Medical (ISM) band. The ISM band ranges between 2.400 GHz and 2.483 GHz. BWT-enabled
devices use seventy-nine 1-megahertz frequencies (from 2.402 to 2.480 GHz) in the ISM band
as shown in Figure 1. BWT-enabled devices use a technique called frequency hopping to minimize
eavesdropping and interference from other networks that use the ISM band. With frequency hopping,
the data is divided into small pieces called packets. The transmitter and receiver exchange a data
packet at one frequency, and then they hop to another frequency to exchange another packet. They
repeat this process until all the data is transmitted.
BWT devices randomly hop between frequencies up to 1600 times per second—much faster than
other types of devices that use the ISM band. This means that if another device, such as a 2.4-GHz
cordless phone, interferes with a BWT network at a particular frequency, the interference only lasts
for about 1/1600 of a second until the BWT devices hop to another frequency. This gives BWT
networks a high immunity to interference from other 2.4-GHz devices.
There are three classes of BWT radio devices, each with a different maximum range:
Class 1 (100 meters); Class 2 (50 meters); and Class 3 (10 meters). HP notebooks
feature Class 3 BWT radios, and HP printers feature Class 1 radios.
Figure 1. BWT-enabled devices hop between frequencies up to 1600 times per second.
3
BWT network topologies
BWT-enabled devices form network topologies called piconets and scatternets. A piconet consists
of up to eight BWT-enabled devices (Figure 2). When a piconet is established, one device sets the
frequency-hopping pattern and the other devices synchronize their signals to the same pattern. The
device that sets the frequency-hopping pattern is called the primary device and the other devices are
called secondary devices. Each piconet has a different frequency-hopping pattern to differentiate its
signals from the signals of other piconets.
Figure 2. A piconet consists of up to eight BWT-enabled devices.
4
A scatternet is formed when two or more piconets are linked by a common BWT-enabled
device (Figure 3). When a device is present in multiple piconets, it synchronizes to the master
of each piconet with which it is currently communicating and sets the hopping pattern of the
piconet in which it is the master.
Figure 3. A scatternet is two or more piconets connected by a common device.
BWT security
BWT security is complex; yet, it is mostly transparent and easy for users to implement. BWT uses
three types of security mechanisms: authentication, authorization, and encryption. Authentication
verifies the identity of the BWT device trying to connect with your device. After authentication is
complete, your Bluetooth device grants (authorizes) another Bluetooth device access to a specific
service. Encryption translates data into a format that can be read by only another device with the
same encryption key.
The implementation of these mechanisms occurs at 3 levels (modes) of security:
• Mode 1—No security; anyone can use the device. This mode is the default setting for
public devices such as printers.
• Mode 2—In this mode, permission to access your device is dependent on the service(s) you
authorize (Service Level security). With your PDA, for example, you can allow another device
to exchange electronic business cards and deny the device access to contact information and
calendar entries.
• Mode 3—In this mode, the devices must be paired before they can establish a connection and
transfer data (Link Level security). For more information, see "Pairing" in the following section.
5
Establishing BWT connections
This section describes how to establish BWT connections using your notebook PC, iPAQ Pocket PC,
printer, and cellular phone. The first step is to activate BWT functionality on each device. Then, you
can select the services (profiles) that your device will make available to other BWT-enabled devices.
If you decide to operate your device in secure mode, you must pair the device with another
BWT-enabled device before they can interoperate. These requirements are explained below.
Activating BWT devices
Notebook PCs
If you are not sure whether your notebook supports BWT, check for the presence of Bluetooth
Devices in Device Manager as follows:
1. Select the Start button in the lower-left corner of the screen.
2. Then select Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > System >
Hardware tab.
3. Select the Device Manager button.
4. If your notebook supports BWT, you will see Bluetooth Devices in the Device Manager
window (Figure 4).
Figure 4. Confirming Bluetooth capability via Device Manager
6
The following 3 steps activate your BWT-enabled notebook PC:
1. Install the BWT software.
2. Enable BWT functionality.
3. Set up the BWT software.
These steps are explained below.
Install the BWT software
The required BWT software comes preloaded on HP notebook PCs; however, you must install
the software as follows:
1. Select Start > All Programs > Software Setup.
2. When the Software Setup Welcome window is displayed, select Next.
3. Select the check box next to Bluetooth by hp to enable the software for installation,
and then select Next.
4. Select Finish to complete the installation and to restart the computer.
Enable BWT functionality
If the wireless light (ICON) is off, turn it on by pressing the wireless button on your notebook. Refer
to your notebook user documentation if you need help locating the wireless button and light. When
you turn on the wireless device for the first time, the Found New Hardware wizard opens. Follow the
instructions in the wizard to load the BWT driver.
Set up the BWT software
After the software is installed and BWT functionality is enabled, a Bluetooth icon will appear in the
Windows System Tray located in the lower-right part of the screen. The Bluetooth icon provides easy
access to Bluetooth operations. The color of the icon indicates the status of the connection (Table 1).
Table 1. Bluetooth status
Disabled
Enabled
Connected
Blue with red logo
Blue with white logo
Blue with green logo
If BWT is disabled (red logo), enable it by right-clicking the Bluetooth icon and selecting
Start the Bluetooth Device. The logo will change from red to white. Then you can use
the Bluetooth Setup wizard to configure the service and security features as follows:
1. Right-click the Bluetooth icon, and then select Explore My Bluetooth Places.
2. Right-click the My Bluetooth Places icon in the Folders pane of Windows
Explorer and select Bluetooth Setup Wizard to begin the configuration process.
For specific instructions about discovering and connecting to other BWT-enabled devices, refer
to the Documentation Library Bluetooth CD that came in the same box as the operating system CD.
7
iPAQ Pocket PCs
Certain h1900, h3800, h3900, and all h2200, h4000, h5000 Series iPAQ Pocket PCs are
shipped with integrated BWT. All h3100, h3600, h3700, h3800, and h3900 Series iPAQ
Pocket PCs support an optional Bluetooth Wireless Expansion Pack.
Select the BWT icon in the lower right corner of the Today screen to activate BWT functionality,
to create BWT connections, or to manage and change the BWT settings. You can also perform
these functions by selecting the Start menu, and then selecting Bluetooth Manager.
If you have an iPAQ that has 802.11 technology, Bluetooth, or both, you can enable or
disable one or both of these wireless technologies by selecting the Start menu, and then
the IPAQ Wireless option.
Printers
The HP 995c Deskjet printer and some models of the HP 450 Deskjet printer feature integrated BWT
capability. After you install the printer software on your notebook, select Start > My Programs >
My Bluetooth Places to manage the BWT printer connection. Refer to the "Selecting BWT device
profiles" section below for a summary of available profiles and the services they enable.
Cellular phones
Activating BWT functionality on a cell phone can be as easy as pressing Menu > Connect >
Bluetooth. After you activate BWT, you can change the default BWT settings and set the level
of discoverability of your phone by other BWT-enabled products, such as computers and PDAs.
The BWT connection can be used to send images, text, business cards, and calendar notes.
Selecting BWT device profiles
Profiles are services that are available for each BWT-enabled device. When two BWT-enabled
devices are within range, they perform a service discovery during which they report a list of available
profiles. If any of the profiles for the two devices match, they can connect and interoperate based on
the matching profiles.
Table 2 describes some of the BWT profiles built into HP notebook PCs, iPAQ Pocket PCs, and
printers. Detailed instructions on performing the functions listed in this section are described in
the documentation that accompanies each HP product. To see the full line of HP BWT offerings
and to view product compatibility, visit http://www.hp.com/products/wireless/PAN/. Also, visit
http://www.hp.com/products/wireless/ for updates to the HP wireless product portfolio.
Table 2. Bluetooth wireless technology profiles supported by HP BWT-enabled products.
Profile
HP products
Description
D = supported by selected models
Notebooks/
Tablet PCs
Handhelds
D
Printers
D
Basic printing
Enables simpler printing from a BWT-enabled
device to a BWT-enabled printer. Using this profile
does not require specific printer drivers. The iPAQ
Pocket PC requires a third-party printing application
such as PrintPocketCE or HP Mobile Printing.
D
D
Dial-up
networking
Allows a device to use a modem that is
attached to another BWT-enabled device.
D
D
File transfer
Allows one BWT-enabled device to browse a file
system on, create or delete files/folders on, or
transfer files from/to another BWT-enabled device.
8
HP products
D = supported by selected models
Profile
Description
Notebooks/
Tablet PCs
Handhelds
D
D
D
Generic access
Defines the general procedures used for
establishing connections to other BWT-enabled
devices that accept connections and service
requests regardless of the devices’ manufacturer.
D
D
D
Generic object
exchange (OBEX)
Enables printing from devices that
use the OBEX protocol.
D
D
D
Hard copy
replacement
Provides the same print quality and print
speed as when printing using a cable, including
management of print jobs, greater control over
formatting, and other printing features.
D
Headset
Allows a BWT-enabled headset to be used as
the audio input/output mechanism for another
BWT-enabled device, such as a computer or cell
phone.
D
Human
interface device
Allows input devices such as a keyboard or mouse
to be wirelessly connected to a BWT-enabled
device.
Network access
Allows a device to access a LAN via a second
BWT-enabled device that is connected to the LAN.
Serial port
Provides a wireless connection that can be
used by applications as though a physical serial
cable connected the devices. It allows you to
synchronize information; print to a BWT-enabled
printer; or transfer information between devices.
Fax
Allows a device to send a fax using a remote
BWT-enabled cell phone, modem, or computer.
D
D
D
D
D
Printers
D
D
D
PIM Item Transfer
Allows two BWT-enabled devices to exchange
Personal Information Manager data such as
business cards, calendar items, email messages,
and notes.
D
D
PIM
synchronization
Allows two BWT-enabled devices to synchronize
Personal Information Manager data.
D
Basic imaging
Allows one BWT-enabled device (such as
a camera) to transfer an image to another
BWT-enabled device (such as a desktop PC)
for storage, editing, or printing.
D
Hands Free
Allows a BWT-enabled computer or BWT-enabled
car to provide audio input/output for a remote
Bluetooth device, such as a cellular phone.
D
Audio Gateway
Allows a BWT-enabled device (such as a
computer) to use the microphone and/or
speakers of another BWT-enabled device
(such as a headset) as an input or output device.
9
Pairing
Pairing is a bonding procedure that allows you to avoid entering access information each time two
devices establish a connection. If Secure Connection is enabled, devices will pair automatically the
first time they connect (a password, or passkey, must be successfully exchanged). When you pair
two devices, they generate and store a common link key so that you do not need to enter the passkey.
Paired devices exchange encrypted data that cannot be deciphered by unauthorized devices. The
devices remain paired even when
• One of the devices is not powered on.
• A service connection is interrupted or the service is stopped.
• One or both of the devices are restarted.
You can manually pair your device with another connected device by right-clicking the device icon
in My Bluetooth Places and selecting Pair Device from the shortcut menu. To unpair a device, rightclick the device icon in My Bluetooth Places, and then select Unpair Device from the shortcut menu.
Summary
Because BWT-enabled devices operate in the unrestricted 2.4-GHz ISM band, numerous
manufacturers can develop BWT-enabled products to use this frequency band. From PDAs
that automatically synchronize contact information with your laptop and cell phone, to a
car that automatically adjusts the seat and mirrors as you approach it, Bluetooth wireless
technology will eventually unite all the gadgets in your world and change forever the way
you work and play.
10
For more information
For additional information, refer to the resources listed below.
Resource description
Web address
Bluetooth Technology
Overview white paper
http://h18004.www1.hp.com/products/wireless/wpan/files/
WhitePaper_BluetoothTechnologyOverview-QA.pdf
HP Bluetooth printer card
http://h10010.www1.hp.com/wwpcJAVA/offweb/vac/us/product_pdfs/BluetoothPrinterCard.pdf
Compatibility matrix
for Bluetooth wireless
technology
http://h18000.www1.hp.com/products/wireless/wpan/btcompmatrix.html
HP wireless product portfolio
http://www.hp.com/products/wireless/
The official Bluetooth website
http://www.bluetooth.com
Bluetooth Special
Interest Group
http://www.bluetooth.org
Ericsson
http://www.ericsson.com/bluetooth/
Nokia
http://www.nokia.com/bluetooth/
Bluetooth Resource Center
http://www.palowireless.com/bluetooth/
How Bluetooth Works
http://www.computer.howstuffworks.com/bluetooth.htm
Bluetooth News
and Information
http://www.groups.yahoo.com/group/blueinfo/
The Geekzone
Bluetooth Guides
http://www.geekzone.co.nz
The Houston Chronicle
Hotlist for Bluetooth
http://www.chron.com/cs/CDA/ssistory.mpl/tech/weekly/2474018
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only
warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty
statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should
be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for
technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.
The Bluetooth trademark is owned by its proprietor and used by
Hewlett-Packard Company under license.
5982-3836ENA1, 05/2004
Maintenance and Service
Guide
HP Pavilion ze2000 Notebook PC
Compaq Presario M2000 Notebook PC
February 2005
This guide is a troubleshooting reference used for maintaining
and servicing the notebook. It provides comprehensive
information on identifying notebook features, components, and
spare parts; troubleshooting notebook problems; and performing
notebook disassembly procedures.
Corporation. Intel, Pentium, and Celeron are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and
other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used
by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. SD Logo is a trademark of its
proprietor.
Maintenance and Service Guide
First Edition: February 2005
Contents
1 Product Description
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
Resetting the Notebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
Power Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
External Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
Design Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–31
2 Troubleshooting
2.1 Computer Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.2 Troubleshooting Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
3 Illustrated Parts Catalog
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Serial Number Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
Notebook Major Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
Miscellaneous Plastics Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12
Mass Storage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–14
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16
Sequential Part Number Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–18
4 Removal and Replacement Preliminaries
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preventing Damage to Removable Drives . . . . . . . .
Preventing Electrostatic Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Packaging and Transporting Precautions . . . . . . . . .
Workstation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding Equipment and Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–1
4–2
4–3
4–4
4–5
4–6
4–6
iii
Contents
5 Removal and Replacement Procedures
5.1 Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5.2 Disassembly Sequence Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5.3 Preparing the Notebook for Disassembly . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.4 Notebook Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–10
5.5 Optical Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11
5.6 Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13
5.7 Mini PCI Communications Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–16
5.8 Keyboard Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–19
5.9 LED Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–22
5.10 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–24
5.11 Display Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–28
5.12 Base Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–33
5.13 Speaker Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–39
5.14 Heat Sink. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–41
5.15 Fan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–43
5.16 Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–45
5.17 Battery Connector Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–47
5.18 Power Connector Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–50
5.19 USB/S-Video Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–52
5.20 Bluetooth Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–54
5.21 System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–56
6 Specifications
A Connector Pin Assignments
B Power Cord Set Requirements
C Screw Listing
Index
iv
1
Product Description
The HP Pavilion ze2000 Notebook PC 1 and the
Compaq Presario M2000 Notebook PC 2 offer advanced
modularity, Intel® Mobile Pentium® M and Celeron®
processors, and extensive multimedia support.
HP Pavilion ze2000 and Compaq Presario M2000
1–1
Product Description
1.1 Features
references are made throughout this Maintenance and
✎ Numerous
Service Guide to “full-featured” and “defeatured” notebook
models. A model is considered to be full-featured if it has
3 Universal Serial Bus ports and the following components:
■ S-Video-out jack
■ Expansion port 2
■ 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader slot or 6-in-1 Memory Reader
slot
A notebook model is considered to be defeatured if it has only
2 Universal Serial Bus ports and none of the components in the
preceding list.
■
The following processors are available, varying by
notebook model:
❏ Intel Pentium M 745 (1.8-GHz) with 400-MHz
front side bus (FSB)
❏ Intel Pentium M 735 (1.7-GHz) with 400-MHz FSB
❏ Intel Pentium M 715A (1.5-GHz) with 400-MHz FSB
❏ Intel Celeron M 360 (1.4-GHz) with 400-MHz FSB
models feature both Intel Pentium M and
✎ Full-featured
Celeron M processors. Defeatured models feature only
Celeron M processors.
1–2
■
15.0-inch XGA (1024 × 768) TFT display with over
16.7 million colors
■
80-, 60-, or 40-GB high-capacity hard drive, varying by
notebook model
Product Description
■
256-MB DDR2 synchronous DRAM (SDRAM) at 400 MHz,
expandable to 1.0 GB
■
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition or Windows XP
Professional, varying by notebook model
■
Full-size Windows keyboard with embedded numeric keypad
■
TouchPad pointing device with on button and dedicated
vertical scroll region
■
Integrated 10Base-T/100 Base-TX Ethernet local area
network (LAN) network interface card (NIC) with RJ-45 jack
■
Integrated high-speed 56K modem with RJ-11 jack
■
Integrated wireless support for Mini PCI IEEE 802.11b and
802.11b/g WLAN device
■
Support for one Type II PC Card slot, with support for both
32-bit (CardBus) and 16-bit PC Cards
■
External 65-watt AC adapter with 3-wire power cord
■
6-cell or 12-cell Li-Ion battery pack
■
Stereo speakers with volume up and down buttons
■
Support for the following optical drives:
❏ 8X DVD-ROM Drive
❏ 24X DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive
❏ 8X DVD±RW/R and CD-RW Combo Drive
❏ 24X CD-ROM Drive (Compaq Presario M2000
notebooks only)
■
Connectors:
❏ External monitor port
❏ Universal Serial Bus (USB) v. 2.0 (up to 3 ports)
❏ RJ-11 (modem) jack
❏ RJ-45 (network) jack
❏ Audio-out (headphone) jack
1–3
Product Description
❏ Audio-in (microphone) jack
❏ Power
❏ IEEE 1394 digital port
❏ S-Video-out jack (select models only)
❏ Expansion port 2
❏ 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader slot (select models only)
❏ 6-in-1 Memory Reader slot (select models only)
1.2 Resetting the Notebook
If the notebook you are servicing has an unknown password,
follow these steps to clear the password. These steps also
clear CMOS:
1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3,
“Preparing the Notebook for Disassembly,” for more
information).
2. Remove the real time clock (RTC) battery (refer to
Section 5.21, “System Board,” for more information).
3. Wait approximately 5 minutes.
4. Replace the RTC battery and reassemble the notebook.
5. Connect AC power to the notebook. Do not reinsert any
battery packs at this time.
6. Turn on the notebook.
All passwords and all CMOS settings have been cleared.
1–4
Product Description
1.3 Power Management
The notebook comes with power management features that
extend battery operating time and conserve power. The
notebook supports the following power management features:
■
Standby
■
Hibernation
■
Setting customization by the user
■
Hotkeys for setting the level of performance
■
Battery calibration
■
Lid switch standby/resume
■
Power/standby button
■
Advanced Configuration and Power Management (ACPM)
compliance
1.4 External Components
The external components on the front of the HP Pavilion ze2000
notebook are shown below and described in Table 1-1.
Front Components, HP Pavilion ze2000
1–5
Product Description
Table 1-1
Front Components
HP Pavilion ze2000
Item
Component
Function
1
Speakers (2)
2
Wireless light (select
models only)
On: One or more optional internal wireless
devices, such as a WLAN and/or a
Bluetooth® device (select models only), are
turned on.
3
Power/standby light
■ On: Notebook is turned on.
■ Blinking: Notebook is in standby.
■ Off: Notebook is off.
4
On or blinking: The internal hard drive or an
optical drive is being accessed.
5
Battery light
■ On: The battery pack is charging.
■ Blinking: The battery pack has reached a
low-battery condition.
■ Off: The battery pack is fully charged or
not inserted.
6
Opens the notebook.
7
Audio-in
(microphone) jack
8
Audio-out
(headphone) jack
Connects optional headphones or powered
stereo speakers. Also connects the audio
function of an audio/video device such as
a television or VCR.
1–6
Product Description
The external components on the front of the Compaq Presario
M2000 notebook are shown below and described in Table 1-2.
Front Components, Compaq Presario M2000
1–7
Product Description
Table 1-2
Front Components
Compaq Presario M2000
Item
Component
Function
1
Speakers (2)
2
models only)
Bluetooth device (select models only), are
turned on.
3
Power/standby light
4
5
Battery light
not inserted.
6
Opens the notebook.
7
Audio-in
(microphone) jack
8
Audio-out
(headphone) jack
1–8
Product Description
The external components on the right side of the HP Pavilion
ze2000 notebook are shown below and described in Table 1-3.
Right-Side Components, HP Pavilion ze2000
1–9
Product Description
Table 1-3
HP Pavilion ze2000
Item
Component
Function
1
USB ports (1 or 2
depending on the
notebook model)
Connect an optional USB device.
2
Reader slot
(select models only)
Supports an optional digital memory card.
3
1394 port
Connects an optional 1394a device such
as a scanner, digital camera, or digital
camcorder.
4
Reader light
On: A digital memory card is being
accessed.
5
Optical drive
6
S-Video-out jack
Connects an optional S-Video device, such
as a television, VCR, camcorder, projector,
or video capture card.
7
Security cable slot
Attaches an optional security cable to the
notebook.
Ä
1–10
Security solutions are designed to act
as deterrents. These deterrents may
not prevent a product from being
mishandled or stolen.
Product Description
The external components on the right side of the Compaq
Presario M2000 notebook are shown below and described in
Table 1-4.
Right-Side Components, Compaq Presario M2000
1–11
Product Description
Table 1-4
Item
Component
Function
1
USB ports (1 or 2
depending on the
notebook model)
2
6-in-1 Memory Reader
slot (select models
only)
3
1394 port (select
models only)
camcorder.
4
light (select models
only)
accessed.
5
Optical drive
6
S-Video-out jack
7
Security cable slot
notebook.
Ä
1–12
Product Description
The external components on the left side of the HP Pavilion
Left-Side Components, HP Pavilion ze2000
1–13
Product Description
Table 1-5
HP Pavilion ze2000
Item
Component
Function
1
Power connector
Connects an AC adapter cable.
2
Monitor port
projector.
3
Expansion port 2*
docking device.
4
RJ-45 jack
5
RJ-11 jack
6
USB port
7
PC Card slot
Supports an optional Type I or Type II 32-bit
8
PC Card slot.
*The notebook has only one expansion port. The term expansion port 2
describes the type of expansion port.
1–14
Product Description
The external components on the left side of the Compaq Presario
Left-Side Components, Compaq Presario M2000
1–15
Product Description
Table 1-6
Item
Component
Function
1
Power connector
2
Monitor port
projector.
3
Expansion port 2*
docking device.
4
5
RJ-11 (modem) jack
6
USB port
7
PC Card slot
8
PC Card slot.
1–16
Product Description
The external components on the rear panel of the HP Pavilion
Rear Panel Components, HP Pavilion ze2000
Table 1-7
Rear Panel Components
HP Pavilion ze2000
Item
Component
Function
1
Battery bay
2
Exhaust vent
components.
Ä
surface, such as pillows, thick rugs
or clothing, to block airflow.
1–17
Product Description
The external components on the rear panel of the Compaq
Presario M2000 notebook are shown below and described
in Table 1-8.
Rear Panel Components, Compaq Presario M2000
Table 1-8
Item
Component
Function
1
Battery bay
2
Exhaust vent
components.
Ä
1–18
Product Description
The notebook keyboard components on the HP Pavilion ze2000
Keyboard Components, HP Pavilion ze2000
1–19
Product Description
Table 1-9
Keyboard Components
HP Pavilion ze2000
Item
Component
Function
1
Function keys (12)
When combined with the fn key, several
keys perform additional tasks as hotkeys.
2
caps lock key
Enables caps lock and turns on the caps
lock light.
3
fn key
4
Windows logo key
Displays the Windows Start menu.
5
Windows
applications key
6
Arrow keys
Moves the cursor around the screen.
7
Keypad keys (15)
Can be used like the keys on an external
numeric keypad.
8
num lock key
On: Enables numeric lock, turns on the
embedded numeric keypad, and turns on
the num lock light.
1–20
Product Description
The notebook keyboard components on the Compaq Presario
Keyboard Components, Compaq Presario M2000
1–21
Product Description
Table 1-10
Keyboard Components
Item
Component
Function
1
Function keys (12)
When combined with the Fn key, the
function keys perform additional tasks as
hotkeys.
2
caps lock key
lock light.
3
Fn key
Fn+F7 decreases screen brightness.
4
Windows logo key
5
Windows
applications key
6
Arrow keys
Move the cursor around the screen.
7
Keypad keys (15)
numeric keypad.
8
num lock key
Enables numeric lock, turns on the
embedded numeric keypad, and turns
on the num lock light.
1–22
Product Description
The notebook top components on the HP Pavilion ze2000
Top Components, HP Pavilion ze2000
Table 1-11
Top Components
HP Pavilion ze2000
Item
Component
Function
1
Left and right
TouchPad buttons
Function like the left and right buttons on an
external mouse.
2
TouchPad
Moves the pointer.
3
Caps lock light
4
Display switch
standby.
1–23
Product Description
Table 1-11
Top Components
HP Pavilion ze2000 (Continued)
Item
Component
Function
5
■ In standby, briefly press to resume
from standby.
from hibernation.
✎ IfandtheWindows
shutdown procedures
notebook.
6
Volume down button
7
Volume mute button
Mute light
8
Volume up button
9
Wireless button (select
models only)
Turns the wireless functionality on or off but
does not create a wireless connection.
establish a wireless connection,
✎ To
a wireless network must already be
set up.
10
Num lock light
On: Num lock or the embedded keypad
is on.
11
Reader light
accessed.
12
TouchPad vertical
scrolling region
1–24
Product Description
The top components on the Compaq Presario M2000 notebook
are shown below and described in Table 1-12.
Top Components, Compaq Presario M2000
Table 1-12
Top Components
Item
Component
Function
1
Left and right
TouchPad buttons
external mouse.
2
TouchPad
Moves the pointer.
3
Caps lock light
4
Display switch
standby.
1–25
Product Description
Table 1-12
Top Components
Compaq Presario M2000 (Continued)
Item
Component
Function
5
Wireless light
(available on select
models)
turned on.
6
from standby.
from hibernation.
✎ IfandtheWindows
shutdown procedures
notebook.
7
Volume down button
8
Volume up button
9
Volume mute button
Mute light
10
Num lock light
is on.
11
only)
accessed.
12
TouchPad vertical and
horizontal scroll
regions
Scroll upward or downward and left or right.
1–26
Product Description
The external components on the bottom of the HP Pavilion
Bottom Components, HP Pavilion ze2000
Table 1-13
Bottom Components
HP Pavilion ze2000
Item
Component
Function
1
Battery bay
2
Battery pack release latch
battery bay.
3
Memory module
compartment
Contains two memory slots that support
replaceable memory modules. The
number of preinstalled memory
modules varies by notebook model.
1–27
Product Description
Table 1-13
Bottom Components
Item
Component
Function
4
Exhaust vents (4)
components.
Ä
hard surface, such as a printer, or
a soft surface, such as pillows,
thick rugs or clothing, to block
airflow.
5
Optical drive
6
Label area
Contains the notebook serial number
and other applicable regulatory labels.
7
Ä
8
1–28
Hard drive bay
To prevent an unresponsive
system and the display of a
warning message, install only a
Mini PCI device authorized for
use in your notebook by the
governmental agency that
regulates wireless devices in your
country. If you install a device and
then receive a warning message,
remove the device to restore
notebook functionality. Then
contact Customer Care.
Product Description
The external components on the bottom of the Compaq Presario
Bottom Components, Compaq Presario M2000
Table 1-14
Bottom Components
Item
Component
Function
1
Battery bay
2
battery bay.
3
Memory module
compartment
1–29
Product Description
Table 1-14
Bottom Components
Item
Component
Function
4
Exhaust vents (4)
components.
Ä
airflow.
5
Optical drive
6
Label area
7
Ä
8
1–30
Hard drive bay
Product Description
1.5 Design Overview
This section presents a design overview of key parts and features
of the notebook. Refer to Chapter 3, “Illustrated Parts Catalog,”
to identify replacement parts, and Chapter 5, “Removal and
Replacement Procedures,” for disassembly steps.
The system board provides the following device connections:
Ä
■
Memory module
■
Mini PCI communications devices
■
Hard drive
■
Display
■
Keyboard and TouchPad
■
Audio
■
Intel Pentium M and Celeron M processors
■
Fan
■
PC Card
CAUTION: To properly ventilate the notebook, allow at least a 7.6-cm
(3-inch) clearance on the left and right sides of the notebook.
The notebook uses an electric fan for ventilation. The fan is
controlled by a temperature sensor and is designed to be turned
on automatically when high temperature conditions exist. These
conditions are affected by high external temperatures, system
power consumption, power management/battery conservation
configurations, battery fast charging, and software applications.
Exhaust air is displaced through the ventilation grill located on
the left side of the notebook.
1–31
2
Troubleshooting
Å
WARNING: Only authorized technicians trained by HP should repair
this equipment. All troubleshooting and repair procedures are detailed
to allow only subassembly-/module-level repair. Because of the
complexity of the individual boards and subassemblies, do not attempt
to make repairs at the component level or modifications to any printed
wiring board. Improper repairs can create a safety hazard. Any
indication of component replacement or printed wiring board
modification may void any warranty or exchange allowances.
2.1 Computer Setup
Computer Setup is a system information and customization utility
that can be used even when the operating system is not working
or will not load. This utility includes settings that are not
available in Windows.
Using Computer Setup
Information and settings in Computer Setup are accessed from
the Main, Security, Advanced, or Tools menus:
1. Turn on or restart the notebook. Press f10 while the
F10 = ROM-Based Setup message is displayed in
the lower-left corner of the screen.
❏ To change the language, use the cursor control keys
to navigate to the Advanced menu.
❏ To view navigation information, press f1.
❏ To return to the Computer Setup menu, press esc.
2–1
Troubleshooting
2. Select the Main, Security, Advanced, or Tools menu.
3. To close Computer Setup and restart the notebook:
❏ Select Exit > Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter.
– or –
❏ Select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then
press enter.
– or –
❏ Select Exit > Load Setup Defaults, and then press enter.
4. When you are prompted to confirm your action, press f10.
Selecting from the Main Menu
Table 2-1
Main Menu
Select
To Do This
System Information
■ Change the system time and system date.
■ View identification information about the
notebook.
■ View specification information about the
processor, memory and cache size, and
system ROM.
2–2
Troubleshooting
Selecting from the Security Menu
Table 2-2
Security Menu
Select
To Do This
Administrator Password
Enter, change, or delete an Administrator
password.
Power-on Password
Enter, change, or delete a power-on password.
DriveLock Passwords
Enable/disable DriveLock; change a DriveLock
user or master password.
Settings are accessible only
✎ DriveLock
when you enter Computer Setup by turning
on (not restarting) the notebook.
Password Options
(Password options can
be selected only when
a power-on password
has been set.)
Enable/disable:
■ QuickLock
■ QuickLock on standby
■ QuickBlank
enable QuickLock on standby or
✎ To
QuickBlank, you must first enable
QuickLock.
Device Security
Enable/disable:
■ Diskette drive startup*
■ CD-ROM or diskette startup
for a DVD-ROM can be entered
✎ Settings
in the CD-ROM field.
*Not applicable to SuperDisk LS-120 drives.
2–3
Troubleshooting
Selecting from the Advanced Menu
Table 2-3
Advanced Menu
Select
To Do This
Language
Change the Computer Setup language.
Boot Order
Enable/disable MultiBoot, which sets a startup
sequence that can include most bootable devices
and media in the system.
Accessibility Options
Allows electronic and information technology to
be accessible to people with varying ranges of
abilities.
Video Memory
Displays the amount of video memory available
on the notebook.
Selecting from the Tools Menu
Table 2-4
Tools Menu
Select
To Do This
Hard Drive Self Test
Run a quick comprehensive self test on hard
drives in the system that support the test features.
2–4
Troubleshooting
2.2 Troubleshooting Flowcharts
Table 2-5
Troubleshooting Flowcharts Overview
Flowchart
Description
2.1
“Flowchart 2.1—Initial Troubleshooting”
2.2
“Flowchart 2.2—No Power, Part 1”
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
“Flowchart 2.6—No Video, Part 1”
2.7
2.8
“Flowchart 2.8—Nonfunctioning Docking Device (if applicable)”
2.9
“Flowchart 2.9—No Operating System (OS) Loading”
2.10
“Flowchart 2.10—No OS Loading, Hard Drive, Part 1”
2.11
2.12
2.13
“Flowchart 2.13—No OS Loading, Diskette Drive”
2–5
Troubleshooting
Table 2-5
Troubleshooting Flowcharts Overview (Continued)
Flowchart
Description
2.14
“Flowchart 2.14—No OS Loading, Optical Drive”
2.15
“Flowchart 2.15—No Audio, Part 1”
2.16
2.17
“Flowchart 2.17—Nonfunctioning Device”
2.18
“Flowchart 2.18—Nonfunctioning Keyboard”
2.19
“Flowchart 2.19—Nonfunctioning Pointing Device”
2.20
“Flowchart 2.20—No Network/Modem Connection”
2–6
Troubleshooting
Flowchart 2.1—Initial Troubleshooting
Begin
troubleshooting.
N
Go to
“Flowchart 2.2—No
Power, Part 1.”
Is there
power?
Y
N
Check
LED board,
speaker
connections.
Beeps,
LEDs, or error
messages?
N
Y
Go to
“Flowchart
2.17—Nonfunction
ing Device.”
All drives
working?
N
Y
Go to
Video, Part 1.”
Is there video?
(no boot)
N
Keyboard/
pointing
device
working?
Y
N
Go to
Operating System
(OS) Loading.”
Is the OS
loading?
Y
N
Is there
sound?
Go to
“Flowchart
2.15—No Audio,
Part 1.”
Y
Y
Go to
“Flowchart
2.18—Nonfunction
ing Keyboard” or
“Flowchart
2.19—Nonfunction
ing Pointing
Device.”
N
Connecting
to network
or modem?
Y
Go to
“Flowchart
2.20—No
Network/Modem
Connection.”
End
2–7
Troubleshooting
Flowchart 2.2—No Power, Part 1
No power
(power LED
is off).
Remove from
docking device
(if applicable).
N
N
Power up
on battery
power?
Power up
on battery
power?
Reset
power.*
Go to
Power, Part 2.”
Y
Y
N
N
Power up
on AC
power?
Power up
on AC power?
Reset
power.*
Y
Go to
Power, Part 3.”
Y
Y
Power up in
docking
device?
Done
N
1. Reseat the power cables in the docking
device and at the AC outlet.
2. Ensure the AC power source is active.
3. Ensure that the power strip is working.
Y
Done
2–8
N
Power up
in docking
device?
*NOTES
1. On select models, there is a separate
reset button.
2. On select models, the notebook can be
reset using the standby switch and
either the lid switch or the main power
switch.
Go to
“Flowchart
2.8—Nonfunctioning
Docking Device (if
applicable).”
Troubleshooting
Continued from
Power, Part 1.”
Visually check for
debris in battery
socket and clean
if necessary.
Y
Power on?
Done
N
Check battery by
recharging it,
moving it to
another notebook,
or replacing it.
N
Replace
power supply
(if applicable).
Power on?
Y
N
Done
Power on?
Go to
Power, Part 3.”
Y
Done
2–9
Troubleshooting
Continued from
Power, Part 2.”
Plug directly
into AC outlet.
Y
Power LED
on?
Done
N
Reseat AC adapter
in notebook and
at power source.
Y
Power on?
Done
N
External
N
Try different
outlet.
Power outlet
active?
Y
Internal or
external AC
adapter?
Replace external
AC adapter.
N
Internal
Go to
Power, Part 4.”
Replace
power cord.
Power on?
Y
Y
Done
Power on?
Done
N
2–10
Troubleshooting
Continued from
Power, Part 3.”
Open
notebook.
Y
Loose or
damaged
parts?
N
Reseat loose
components and
boards and
replace damaged
items.
Close
notebook and
retest.
N
Power on?
Y
Done
Replace the following items (if applicable). Check
notebook operation after each replacement:
1. Internal DC-DC converter*
2. Internal AC adapter
3. Processor board*
4. System board*
*NOTE: Replace these items as a set to prevent
shorting out among components.
2–11
Troubleshooting
Flowchart 2.6—No Video, Part 1
No video.
Docking Device
*NOTE: To change from internal to
external display, use the hotkey
combination.
Go to
Video, Part 2.”
Stand-alone
or docking
device?
Stand-alone
Internal or
external
display*?
Y
Adjust
brightness.
A
Adjust
brightness.
Press lid
switch to ensure
operation.
Y
Video OK?
Done
N
Internal
External
Video OK?
Y
Done
N
Video OK?
Done
N
Replace the following one at a time. Test after each replacement.
1. Cable between notebook and notebook display (if applicable)
2. Display
3. System board
Check for bent
pins on cable.
N
Video OK?
Y
Internal and
external
video OK?
Replace
system
board.
Y
Done
2–12
N
Try
another
display.
Done
Troubleshooting
Continued from
Video, Part 1.”
Remove
notebook from
docking device,
if connected.
Adjust
display
brightness.
Check brightness
of external
monitor.
N
Y
Go to “A” in
Video, Part 1.”
Video OK?
Y
Video OK?
Done
N
Check that notebook is properly
seated in docking device,
for bent pins on cable, and for
monitor connection.
Try another
external
monitor.
Y
Video OK?
Y
Internal
and external
video OK?
Done
Done
N
N
Adjust external
monitor display.
Go to
“Flowchart
Docking Device (if
applicable).”
2–13
Troubleshooting
Flowchart 2.8—Nonfunctioning Docking Device
(if applicable)
Nonfunctioning
docking device.
Reseat power
cord in docking
device and
power outlet.
Check voltage
setting on docking
device.
Reinstall
notebook into
docking device.
Y
Reset monitor
cable connector at
docking device.
Docking
device
operating?
N
Y
Docking
device
operating?
N
Remove
notebook, reseat
all internal parts,
and replace any
damaged items in
docking device.
2–14
Done
Done
Replace the following docking device
components one at a time. Check notebook
operation after each replacement.
1. Power supply
2. I/O board
3. Backplane board
4. Switch box
5. Docking device motor mechanism
Troubleshooting
Flowchart 2.9—No Operating System (OS)
Loading
No OS
loading.*
Reseat power
cord in docking
device and
power outlet.
No OS loading from hard drive,
go to “Flowchart 2.10—No OS Loading,
Hard Drive, Part 1.”
No OS loading from diskette drive,
go to “Flowchart 2.13—No OS Loading, Diskette
Drive.”
No OS loading from CD- or DVD-ROM drive,
Optical Drive.”
No OS loading from network,
go to “Flowchart 2.20—No Network/Modem
Connection.”
*NOTE: Before beginning troubleshooting, always
check cable connections, cable ends, and drives
for bent or damaged pins.
2–15
Troubleshooting
Flowchart 2.10—No OS Loading, Hard Drive,
Part 1
OS not
loading from
hard drive.
Y
Nonsystem
disk message?
Go to
OS Loading,
N
Reseat
external
hard drive.
Y
OS loading?
Done
N
N
Boot
from
CD?
N
Y
Boot
from
diskette?
Check the Setup
utility for correct
booting order.
Y
Change boot
priority through
the Setup utility
and reboot.
N
Boot
from
hard drive?
N
Y
Boot
from
hard drive?
Done
Y
2–16
Go to
“Flowchart
2.13—No OS
Loading, Diskette
Drive.”
Go to
“Flowchart
Device.”
Troubleshooting
Part 2
Continued from
OS Loading,
Reseat
hard drive.
N
1. Replace
hard drive.
2. Replace
system board.
CD or
diskette in
drive?
Y
Y
Hard drive
accessible?
Done
N
Remove
diskette and
reboot.
Run FDISK.
Y
Boot
from
hard drive?
N
Done
N
Hard drive
partitioned?
Y
N
Boot
from diskette
drive?
Y
Go to
“Flowchart
2.13—No OS
Loading, Diskette
Drive.”
Create partition,
and then format
hard drive to
bootable
C:\ prompt.
N
Hard drive
formatted?
Format hard drive
and bring to
a bootable
C:\ prompt.
Notebook
booted?
Load OS using
Operating System disc
(if applicable).
Y
N
Y
Hard drive
accessible?
Y
Done
N
Go to
OS Loading,
Go to
OS Loading,
2–17
Troubleshooting
Part 3
Continued from
OS Loading,
N
System
files on hard
drive?
Install OS
and reboot.
Y
Y
Y
Virus
on
hard drive?
OS
loading from
hard drive?
Clean virus.
N
Done
N
Y
Run SCANDISK and
check for
bad sectors.
Diagnostics
on diskette?
Replace
hard drive.
N
N
Can bad
sectors
be fixed?
Run diagnostics
and follow
recommendations.
Replace
hard drive.
Y
N
Boot from
hard drive?
Fix bad
sectors.
Replace
hard drive.
Y
Done
2–18
Troubleshooting
Flowchart 2.13—No OS Loading, Diskette Drive
Y
OS not loading
from
diskette drive.
Reseat
diskette drive.
OS
loading?
Done
N
Y
N
Bootable
diskette
in drive?
Nonsystem
disk message?
N
Y
N
Check diskette
for system files.
Try different
diskette.
Go to
“Flowchart
2.17—Nonfunction
ing Device.”
Boot
from another
device?
Y
Y
N
Diskette
drive enabled
in the Setup
utility?
Enable drive
and cold boot
notebook.
1. Replace
diskette drive.
2. Replace system
board.
Nonsystem
disk error?
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Install bootable
diskette and
reboot notebook.
Is diskette
drive boot
order
correct?
Reset the notebook.
Refer to
Section 1.2,
“Resetting the
Notebook,” for
instructions.
Change boot
priority using
the Setup utility.
Go to
“Flowchart
Device.”
OS
loading?
Done
N
2–19
Troubleshooting
Flowchart 2.14—No OS Loading, Optical Drive
Y
No OS
loading from
CD-ROM or
DVD-ROM drive.
N
Bootable
disc in
drive?
Disc
in drive?
Y
N
Install
bootable disc.
Install bootable
disc and
reboot
notebook.
Try another
bootable disc.
Y
Boots from
CD or DVD?
Done
N
Y
Boots from
CD or DVD?
Reseat
drive.
Done
N
N
Booting
from another
device?
Y
Y
Booting
order
correct?
N
Go to
“Flowchart
Device.”
Reset the notebook.
Refer to
Section 1.2,
“Resetting the
Notebook,” for
instructions.
Go to
“Flowchart
Device.”
Correct boot
order using
the Setup utility.
2–20
Troubleshooting
Flowchart 2.15—No Audio, Part 1
Y
Turn up audio
internally or
externally.
No audio.
Audio?
Done
N
N
Y
Notebook in
docking device
(if applicable)?
Go to
“Flowchart
2.16—No Audio,
Part 2.”
Internal
audio?
Undock
N
Y
Go to
“Flowchart
2.16—No Audio,
Part 2.”
components one at a time, as applicable.
Check audio status after each change.
1. Reseat docking device audio cable.
2. Replace audio cable.
3. Replace speaker.
4. Replace docking device audio board.
5. Replace backplane board.
6. Replace I/O board.
Y
Go to
“Flowchart
Device.”
Audio?
Done
N
2–21
Troubleshooting
Continued from
“Flowchart
2.15—No Audio,
Part 1.”
N
Audio
driver in OS
configured?
Reload
audio drivers.
Y
N
Correct
drivers for
application?
Load drivers and
set configuration
in OS.
Y
Connect to
external
speaker.
N
Audio?
Y
Replace audio
board and
speaker
connections
in notebook
(if applicable).
Y
Audio?
Done
N
1. Replace internal speakers.
2. Replace audio board (if applicable).
3. Replace system board.
2–22
Troubleshooting
Flowchart 2.17—Nonfunctioning Device
Nonfunctioning
device.
Reseat
device.
Unplug the nonfunctioning device from the notebook
and inspect cables and plugs for bent or broken pins
or other damage.
Y
Clear
CMOS.
Any physical
device detected?
Fix or
replace
broken item.
Replace hard drive.
Go to
Operating System
(OS) Loading.”
N
Reattach device.
Close notebook,
plug in power,
and reboot.
N
Device
boots
properly?
N
Replace NIC.
If integrated NIC,
replace system
board.
Y
Device
boots
properly?
Y
Done
Replace diskette
drive.
Done
2–23
Troubleshooting
Flowchart 2.18—Nonfunctioning Keyboard
Keyboard
not operating
properly.
Connect notebook
to good external
keyboard.
N
External
device
works?
Replace
system
board.
Y
Reseat internal
keyboard
connector
(if applicable).
N
Replace internal
keyboard or
cable.
OK?
Y
Y
Done
OK?
Done
N
Replace
system
board.
2–24
Troubleshooting
Flowchart 2.19—Nonfunctioning Pointing
Device
Pointing device
not operating
properly.
Connect notebook
to good external
pointing device.
N
Replace
system
board.
External
device
works?
Y
Reseat internal
pointing device
connector
(if applicable).
N
Replace internal
pointing device
or cable.
OK?
Y
Y
Done
OK?
Done
N
Replace
system
board.
2–25
Troubleshooting
Flowchart 2.20—No Network/Modem
Connection
No network
or modem
connection.
N
Network
or modem jack
active?
Replace jack
or have jack
activated.
Y
Y
Connect
to nondigital
line.
Digital
line?
N
Y
N
NIC/modem
configured
in OS?
Reload
drivers and
reconfigure.
Done
OK?
N
Y
Disconnect all
power from
the notebook
and open.
Replace NIC/modem
(if applicable).
Y
Reseat NIC/modem
(if applicable).
OK?
Done
N
Replace
system
board.
2–26
3
Illustrated Parts Catalog
This chapter provides an illustrated parts breakdown and a
reference for spare part numbers and option part numbers.
3.1 Serial Number Location
When ordering parts or requesting information, provide the
notebook serial number and model number located on the bottom
of the notebook.
Serial Number Location
3–1
3.2 Notebook Major Components
Notebook Major Components, HP Pavilion ze2000
3–2
Table 3-1
Spare Parts: Notebook Major Components
Item
Description
1
Display assemblies (include wireless antenna boards
and cables)
Spare Part
Number
15.0-inch, XGA TFT, for use on HP Pavilion ze2000
models
381065-001
15.0-inch, XGA TFT, for use on Compaq Presario
M2000 models
381066-001
Display hinge brackets (not illustrated)
For use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models
382417-001
For use on Compaq Presario M2000 models
383190-001
Hinge cover (not illustrated; for use only on
Compaq Presario M2000 models)
2
3
382418-001
Keyboard covers (include wireless button and light)
with wireless capability
For use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models without
wireless capability
382406-001
For use on Compaq Presario M2000 models with
wireless capability
without wireless capability
382407-001
382408-001
382409-001
LED boards (include cable, not illustrated)
382415-001
382907-001
3–3
Notebook Major Components, Compaq Presario M2000
3–4
Table 3-1
Spare Parts: Notebook Major Components (Continued)
Item
Description
4
Keyboards
Spare Part
Number
For use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in:
Belgium
Brazil
Denmark
France
French Canada
Germany
Greece
Israel
Italy
Korea
Latin America
Europe and the
Netherlands
Norway
Portugal
367778-A41
367778-201
367778-081
367778-051
367778-121
367778-041
367778-DJ1
367778-BB1
367778-061
367778-AD1
367778-161
367778-331
367778-091
367778-131
Saudi Arabia
Spain
Sweden/Finland
Switzerland
Taiwan
Thailand
United Kingdom
Asia Pacific,
Australia,
Canada,
Hong Kong,
People’s
Republic
of China, and
the United
States
367778-171
367778-071
367778-B71
367778-111
367778-AB1
367778-281
367778-031
367778-001
For use on Compaq Presario M2000 models in:
Denmark
France
French Canada
International
Italy
Korea
Latin America
367777-081
367777-051
367777-121
367777-021
367777-061
367777-AD1
367777-161
Norway
Spain
Sweden/Finland
Taiwan
Thailand
United Kingdom
United States
367777-091
367777-071
367777-B71
367777-AB1
367777-281
367777-031
367777-001
3–5
3–6
Table 3-1
Item
Description
5
Top covers (include TouchPad)
6
Spare Part
Number
For use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models with
full-featured models
defeatured models
382396-001
For use on Compaq M2000 models with
defeatured models
382397-001
382905-001
382906-001
Speaker assemblies
382410-001
383189-001
7
Broadcomm Bluetooth Wireless LAN board
376651-001
8
USB/S-Video controller board
382416-001
9
Power connector board
382414-001
10
Fan (includes thermal pad)
382411-001
11
Heat sink (includes thermal pad)
382412-001
12
Processors (include thermal pad)
Intel Pentium M 745 (1.8-GHz) with 400-MHz FSB
Intel Pentium M 715A (1.5-GHz) with 400-MHz FSB
Intel Celeron M 360 (1.4-GHz) with 400-MHz FSB
13
Battery connector board
373053-001
373052-001
367771-001
380690-001
380033-001
380032-001
382413-001
3–7
3–8
Table 3-1
Item
Description
14
System boards (include disk cell RTC battery)
15
16
Spare Part
Number
For use on models with full-featured models
381062-001
For use on models with defeatured models
381061-001
Base enclosures
382398-001
382399-001
Hard drives (all 4200-rpm, include frame and connector)
80 GB
60 GB
40 GB
381398-001
381397-001
381396-001
Miscellaneous Plastics Kit
17a
17b
17c
382400-001
382401-001
Includes:
Hard drive cover (includes two captive screws)
Memory module compartment cover (includes 2 captive screws)
Mini PCI compartment cover (includes 2 captive screws)
Not illustrated:
PC Card slot space saver
Notebook feet (4)
3–9
3–10
Table 3-1
Item
Description
18
Mini PCI communications cards
802.11b/g Broadcomm (MOW)
802.11b/g Broadcomm (ROW)
802.11b Intel (MOW)
802.11b Intel (ROW)
802.11b/g Intel (MOW)
802.11b/g Intel (ROW)
19
21
373047-001
373048-001
373023-001
373024-001
373026-001
373025-001
Memory modules (266 MHz)
512-MB
256-MB
20
Spare Part
Number
381395-001
381394-001
Optical drives (include bezel)
8X DVD-ROM drive
24X DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive
8X DVD±RW/R and CD-RW Combo Drive
381399-001
381401-001
381403-001
8X DVD-ROM drive
24X CD-ROM drive
381400-001
381402-001
381404-001
382395-001
Battery packs
12-cell, 8.8-AHr
6-cell, 4.4-AHr
367760-001
367759-001
3–11
3.3 Miscellaneous Plastics Kit
3–12
Table 3-2
Spare Part Number Information
Item
Description
Spare Part
Number
1
2
3
4
5
367765-001
367766-001
Includes:
Memory module compartment cover
Mini PCI compartment cover
Hard drive cover
Notebook feet (4)
3–13
3.4 Mass Storage Devices
Mass Storage Devices
3–14
Table 3-3
Spare Part
Number
Item
Description
1
Hard drives (all 4200-rpm; include frame and connector)
80-GB
60-GB
40-GB
2
381398-001
381397-001
381396-001
Optical drives
8X DVD-ROM Drive
381399-001
381401-001
381403-001
8X DVD-ROM Drive
24X CD-ROM Drive
381400-001
381402-001
381404-001
382395-001
USB digital drive (not illustrated)
364727-001
3–15
3.5 Miscellaneous
Table 3-4
Spare Parts: Miscellaneous (not illustrated)
Description
Spare Part
Number
Logo Kits
382404-001
382405-001
Remote control (for use only on HP ze2000
notebook models)
371694-001
USB travel mouse
309674-001
Notebook entertainment cable and Y-cable
375759-001
65-watt AC adapter
371790-001
Screw Kit (includes the following screws; refer to Appendix C, “Screw Listing,”
for more information on screw specifications and usage)
■
■
■
■
382402-001
382403-001
Phillips PM2.5×4.0 screw
■ Phillips PM2.0×4.0 screw
Phillips PM2.0×7.0 round head screw ■ Phillips PM2.0×3.0 screw
3–16
Table 3-4
Spare Parts: Miscellaneous (not illustrated) (Continued)
Description
Spare Part
Number
Power cords
For use in:
Australia and New Zealand
373979-011
Belgium, Europe, Finland, France, Germany, Greece,
the Netherlands, Norway, Portugal, Spain, and Sweden
373979-021
Brazil
373979-201
Canada, French Canada, Latin America, Taiwan,
Thailand, and the United States
373979-001
Denmark
373979-081
Hong Kong and the United Kingdom
373979-031
Israel
373979-BB1
Italy
373979-061
Japan
373979-291
Korea
373979-AD1
People’s Republic of China
373979-AA1
Switzerland
373979-111
3–17
3.6 Sequential Part Number Listing
Table 3-5
Spare Parts: Sequential Part Number Listing
Spare Part
Number
Description
309674-001
USB travel mouse
367759-001
Battery pack, 6-cell, 4.4-AHr
367760-001
367771-001
Processor, Intel Pentium M 725 (1.6-GHz) with 400-MHz FSB
(includes thermal pad)
367777-001
Keyboard for use on Compaq Presario M2000 models in the
United States
367777-021
Keyboard for use on Compaq Presario M2000 international
models
367777-031
United Kingdom
367777-051
Keyboard for use on Compaq Presario M2000 models in France
367777-061
Keyboard for use on Compaq Presario M2000 models in Italy
367777-071
Keyboard for use on Compaq Presario M2000 models in Spain
367777-081
Keyboard for use on Compaq Presario M2000 models in
Denmark
367777-091
Norway
367777-121
Keyboard for use on Compaq Presario M2000 models in French
Canada
367777-161
Latin America
3–18
Table 3-5
Spare Parts: Sequential Part Number Listing (Continued)
Spare Part
Number
Description
367777-281
Thailand
367777-AB1
Keyboard for use on Compaq Presario M2000 models in Taiwan
367777-AD1
Keyboard for use on Compaq Presario M2000 models in Korea
367777-B71
Sweden/Finland
367778-001
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in Asia Pacific,
Australia, Canada, Hong Kong, the People’s Republic of China,
and the United States
367778-031
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in
the United Kingdom
367778-051
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in France
367778-061
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in Italy
367778-071
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in Spain
367778-081
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in Denmark
367778-091
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in Norway
367778-111
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in Switzerland
367778-121
French Canada
367778-131
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in Portugal
367778-151
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in Greece
367778-161
Latin America
367778-171
Saudi Arabia
3–19
Table 3-5
Spare Part
Number
Description
367778-201
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in Brazil
367778-281
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in Thailand
367778-331
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in Europe and
the Netherlands
367778-A41
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in Belgium
367778-AB1
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in Taiwan
367778-AD1
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in Korea
367778-B71
Sweden/Finland
367778-BB1
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in Israel
371694-001
Remote control (for use only on HP ze2000 models)
371790-001
65-watt AC adapter
373023-001
Mini PCI communications card, 802.11b Intel (MOW)
373024-001
Mini PCI communications card, 802.11b Intel (ROW)
373025-001
Mini PCI communications card, 802.11b/g Intel (ROW)
373026-001
Mini PCI communications card, 802.11b/g Intel (MOW)
373047-001
Mini PCI communications card, 802.11b/g Broadcomm (MOW)
373048-001
Mini PCI communications card, 802.11b/g Broadcomm (ROW)
373052-001
373053-001
373979-001
Power cord for use in Canada, French Canada, Latin America,
Taiwan, Thailand, and the United States
3–20
Table 3-5
Spare Part
Number
Description
373979-011
Power cord for use in Australia and New Zealand
373979-021
Power cord for use in Belgium, Europe, Finland, France,
Germany, Greece, the Netherlands, Norway, Portugal, Spain,
and Sweden
373979-031
Power cord for use in Hong Kong and the United Kingdom
373979-061
Power cord for use in Italy
373979-081
Power cord for use in Denmark
373979-111
Power cord for use in Switzerland
373979-201
Power cord for use in Brazil
373979-AA1
Power cord for use in People’s Republic of China
373979-AD1
Power cord for use in Korea
373979-BB1
Power cord for use in Israel
375759-001
376651-001
Broadcomm Bluetooth Wireless LAN
380032-001
Processor, Intel Celeron M 350 (1.3-GHz) with 400-MHz FSB
380033-001
380690-001
Processor, Intel Pentium M 715A (1.5-GHz) with 400-MHz FSB
381061-001
System board for use on models with defeatured models
(includes disk cell RTC battery)
381062-001
System board for use on models with full-featured models
3–21
Table 3-5
Spare Part
Number
Description
381065-001
Display assembly, 15.0-inch, XGA TFT, for use on
HP Pavilion ze2000 models (includes wireless antenna boards
and cables)
381066-001
Compaq Presario M2000 models (includes wireless antenna
boards and cables)
381394-001
Memory module, 256-MB (266 MHz)
381395-001
381396-001
Hard drive, 4200-rpm, 40-GB (includes frame and connector)
381397-001
381398-001
381399-001
8X DVD-ROM Drive for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models
(includes bezel)
381400-001
8X DVD-ROM Drive for use on Compaq Presario M2000
models (includes bezel)
381401-001
24X DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive for use on HP Pavilion ze2000
381402-001
24X DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive for use on
Compaq Presario M2000 models (includes bezel)
381403-001
8X DVD±RW/R and CD-RW Combo Drive for use on
HP Pavilion ze2000 models (includes bezel)
381404-001
382395-001
24X CD-ROM Drive for use on Compaq Presario M2000
382396-001
Top cover for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models with
full-featured models (includes TouchPad)
3–22
Table 3-5
Spare Part
Number
Description
382397-001
Top cover for use on Compaq M2000 models with full-featured
models (includes TouchPad)
382398-001
Base enclosure for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models
382399-001
Base enclosure for use on Compaq Presario M2000 models
382400-001
Miscellaneous Plastics Kit for use on HP Pavilion ze2000
models
382401-001
Miscellaneous Plastics Kit for use on Compaq Presario M2000
models
382402-001
Screw Kit for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models
382403-001
Screw Kit For use on Compaq Presario M2000 models
382404-001
Logo Kit for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models
382405-001
Logo Kit for use on Compaq Presario M2000 models
382406-001
Keyboard cover for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models
with wireless capability (includes wireless button and light)
382407-001
Keyboard cover for use on Compaq Presario M2000 models
382408-001
Keyboard cover for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models without
wireless capability (includes wireless button and light)
382409-001
without wireless capability (includes wireless button and light)
382410-001
Speaker assembly for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models
382411-001
382412-001
382413-001
382414-001
3–23
Table 3-5
Spare Part
Number
Description
382415-001
LED board for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models
(includes cable)
382416-001
382417-001
Display hinge brackets for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models
382418-001
Hinge covers (for use only on Compaq Presario M2000 models)
382905-001
defeatured models (includes TouchPad)
382906-001
Top cover for use on Compaq M2000 models with defeatured
382907-001
LED board for use on Compaq Presario M2000 models
(includes cable)
383189-001
Speaker assembly for use on Compaq Presario M2000 models
383190-001
Display hinge brackets for use on Compaq Presario M2000
models
3–24
4
Removal and Replacement
Preliminaries
This chapter provides essential information for proper and
safe removal and replacement service.
4.1 Tools Required
You will need the following tools to complete the removal and
replacement procedures:
■ Magnetic driver
■ Phillips P0 driver
■ 5.0-mm socket for system board locks
■ Flat-bladed driver
■ Tool kit—includes connector removal tool, loopback plugs,
and case utility tool
4–1
Removal and Replacement Preliminaries
4.2 Service Considerations
The following sections include some of the considerations
that you should keep in mind during disassembly and assembly
procedures.
you remove each subassembly from the notebook, place
✎ As
the subassembly (and all accompanying s) away from the work
area to prevent damage.
Plastic Parts
Using excessive force during disassembly and reassembly can
damage plastic parts. Use care when handling the plastic parts.
Apply pressure only at the points designated in the maintenance
instructions.
Cables and Connectors
Ä
CAUTION: When servicing the notebook, ensure that cables are
placed in their proper locations during the reassembly process.
Improper cable placement can damage the notebook.
Cables must be handled with extreme care to avoid damage.
Apply only the tension required to unseat or seat the cables
during removal and insertion. Handle cables by the connector
whenever possible. In all cases, avoid bending, twisting, or
tearing cables. Ensure that cables are routed in such a way that
they cannot be caught or snagged by parts being removed or
replaced. Handle flex cables with extreme care; these cables
tear easily.
4–2
4.3 Preventing Damage to
Removable Drives
Removable drives are fragile components that must be handled
with care. To prevent damage to the notebook, damage to a
removable drive, or loss of information, observe the following
precautions:
■ Before removing or inserting a hard drive, shut down the
notebook. If you are unsure whether the notebook is off or
in hibernation, turn the notebook on, and then shut it down
■ Before removing a diskette drive or optical drive, ensure that
a diskette or disc is not in the drive and ensure that the optical
drive tray is closed.
■ Before handling a drive, ensure that you are discharged of
static electricity. While handling a drive, avoid touching the
connector.
■ Handle drives on surfaces covered with at least one inch of
shock-proof foam.
■ Avoid dropping drives from any height onto any surface.
■ After removing a hard drive, an optical drive, or a diskette
drive, place it in a static-proof bag.
■ Avoid exposing a hard drive to products that have magnetic
fields, such as monitors or speakers.
■ Avoid exposing a drive to temperature extremes or liquids.
■ If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble pack
mailer or other suitable form of protective packaging and
label the package “Fragile: Handle With Care.”
4–3
4.4 Preventing Electrostatic Damage
Many electronic components are sensitive to electrostatic
discharge (ESD). Circuitry design and structure determine the
degree of sensitivity. Networks built into many integrated circuits
provide some protection, but in many cases, the discharge
contains enough power to alter device parameters or melt
silicon junctions.
A sudden discharge of static electricity from a finger or other
conductor can destroy static-sensitive devices or microcircuitry.
Often the spark is neither felt nor heard, but damage occurs.
An electronic device exposed to electrostatic discharge might not
be affected at all and can work perfectly throughout a normal
cycle. Or the device might function normally for a while, then
degrade in the internal layers, reducing its life expectancy.
4–4
4.5 Packaging and Transporting
Precautions
Use the following grounding precautions when packaging and
transporting equipment:
■ To avoid hand contact, transport products in static-safe
containers, such as tubes, bags, or boxes.
■ Protect all electrostatic-sensitive parts and assemblies with
conductive or approved containers or packaging.
■ Keep electrostatic-sensitive parts in their containers until
the parts arrive at static-free workstations.
■ Place items on a grounded surface before removing items
from their containers.
■ Always be properly grounded when touching a sensitive
component or assembly.
■ Store reusable electrostatic-sensitive parts from assemblies
in protective packaging or nonconductive foam.
■ Use transporters and conveyors made of antistatic belts and
roller bushings. Ensure that mechanized equipment used for
moving materials is wired to ground and that proper materials
are selected to avoid static charging. When grounding is not
possible, use an ionizer to dissipate electric charges.
4–5
4.6 Workstation Precautions
Use the following grounding precautions at workstations:
■ Cover the workstation with approved static-shielding material
(refer to Table 4-2, “Static-Shielding Materials”).
■ Use a wrist strap connected to a properly grounded work
surface and use properly grounded tools and equipment.
■ Use conductive field service tools, such as cutters, drivers,
and vacuums.
■ When using fixtures must directly contact dissipative surfaces,
use fixtures made only of static-safe materials.
■ Keep the work area free of nonconductive materials, such
as ordinary plastic assembly aids and Styrofoam.
■ Handle electrostatic-sensitive components, parts, and
assemblies by the case or PCM laminate. Handle these
items only at static-free workstations.
■ Avoid contact with pins, leads, or circuitry.
■ Turn off power and input signals before inserting or
removing connectors or test equipment.
4.7 Grounding Equipment and
Methods
Grounding equipment must include either a wrist strap or a
foot strap at a grounded workstation.
■ When seated, wear a wrist strap connected to a grounded
system. Wrist straps are flexible straps with a minimum of
one megohm ±10% resistance in the ground cords. To provide
proper ground, wear a strap snugly against the skin at all times.
On grounded mats with banana-plug connectors, use alligator
clips to connect a wrist strap.
■ When standing, use foot straps and a grounded floor mat.
Foot straps (heel, toe, or boot straps) can be used at standing
workstations and are compatible with most types of shoes
or boots. On conductive floors or dissipative floor mats, use
foot straps on both feet with a minimum of one megohm
resistance between the operator and ground. To be effective,
the conductive strips must be worn in contact with the skin.
4–6
Other grounding equipment recommended for use in preventing
electrostatic damage includes:
■ Antistatic tape
■ Antistatic smocks, aprons, and sleeve protectors
■ Conductive bins and other assembly or soldering aids
■ Nonconductive foam
■ Conductive tabletop workstations with ground cords of
one megohm resistance
■ Static-dissipative tables or floor mats with hard ties to
the ground
■ Field service kits
■ Static awareness labels
■ Material-handling packages
■ Nonconductive plastic bags, tubes, or boxes
■ Metal tote boxes
■ Electrostatic voltage levels and protective materials
4–7
Table 4-1 shows how humidity affects the electrostatic voltage
levels generated by different activities.
Table 4-1
Typical Electrostatic Voltage Levels
Relative Humidity
Event
10%
40%
55%
Walking across carpet
35,000 V
15,000 V
7,500 V
Walking across vinyl floor
12,000 V
5,000 V
3,000 V
Motions of bench worker
6,000 V
800 V
400 V
Removing DIPS from plastic tube
2,000 V
700 V
400 V
Removing DIPS from vinyl tray
11,500 V
4,000 V
2,000 V
Removing DIPS from Styrofoam
14,500 V
5,000 V
3,500 V
Removing bubble pack from PCB
26,500 V
20,000 V
7,000 V
Packing PCBs in foam-lined box
21,000 V
11,000 V
5,000 V
✎ A product can be degraded by as little as 700 V.
Table 4-2 lists the shielding protection provided by antistatic
bags and floor mats.
Table 4-2
Static-Shielding Materials
Material
Use
Voltage Protection Level
Antistatic plastic
Bags
1,500 V
Carbon-loaded plastic
Floor mats
7,500 V
Metallized laminate
Floor mats
5,000 V
4–8
5
Procedures
This chapter provides removal and replacement procedures.
There are 61 screws, in 10 different sizes, that must be removed,
replaced, or loosened when servicing the notebook. Make special
note of each screw size and location during removal and
replacement.
Refer to Appendix C, “Screw Listing,” for detailed information
on screw sizes, locations, and usage.
5–1
Removal and Replacement Procedures
5.1 Serial Number
Report the notebook serial number to HP when requesting
information or ordering spare parts. The serial number is
located on the bottom of the notebook.
5–2
5.2 Disassembly Sequence Chart
Use the chart below to determine the section number to be
referenced when removing notebook components.
Disassembly Sequence Chart
Section
Description
5.3
Preparing the notebook for
disassembly
Battery pack
Hard drive
# of Screws Removed
0
2 loosened to remove hard
drive cover
4 to disassemble hard drive
5.4
Notebook feet
0
5.5
Optical drive
1
5.6
Memory module
2 loosened
5.7
Mini PCI communications card
1 loosened
Ä
To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a
warning message, install only a Mini PCI device authorized
for use in your notebook by the governmental agency that
regulates wireless devices in your country. If you install a
device and then receive a warning message, remove the
device to restore notebook functionality. Then contact
Customer Care.
5.8
Keyboard cover
2
5.9
LED cover
2
5.10
Keyboard
4
5–3
Disassembly Sequence Chart (Continued)
Section
Description
# of Screws Removed
5.11
Display assembly
HP Pavilion ze2000 = 4
Compaq Presario M2000 = 6
5.12
Base enclosure
5.13
Speaker assembly
0
5.14
Heat sink
3
5.15
Fan
2
5.16
Processor
0
5.17
2
5.18
2
5.19
2
5.20
Bluetooth board
2
5.21
System board
5–4
5.3 Preparing the Notebook for
Disassembly
Before you begin any removal or installation procedures:
1. Shut down the notebook. If you are unsure whether the
notebook is off or in hibernation, turn the computer on,
and then shut it down through the operating system.
3. Disconnect the power cord.
5–5
Battery Pack Spare Part Number Information
12-cell, 8.8-AHr
6-cell, 4.4-AHr
367760-001
367759-001
4. Remove the battery pack by following these steps:
a. Turn the notebook upside down with the front panel
toward you.
b. Slide and hold the battery release latch 1 to the left.
(The front edge of the battery pack disengages from
the notebook.)
c. Lift the front edge of the battery pack up and swing
it back 2.
d. Remove the battery pack.
Removing the Battery Pack
Reverse the above procedure to install the battery pack.
5–6
Hard Drive Spare Part Number Information
80-GB (4200-rpm; includes frame and connector)
381398-001
381397-001
381396-001
5. Remove the hard drive by following these steps:
a. Position the notebook with the rear panel toward you.
b. Loosen the 2 black PM2.0×5.0 screws 1 that secure the
hard drive cover to the notebook.
c. Lift the right side of the cover and swing it to the left 2.
d. Remove the hard drive cover.
hard drive cover is included in the Miscellaneous
✎ The
Plastics Kits, spare part numbers 382400-001 (for use on
HP Pavilion ze2000 models) and 382401-001 (for use on
Compaq Presario M2000 models).
Removing the Hard Drive Cover
5–7
e. Use the mylar tab 1 on the right side of the hard drive to
lift the right side of the hard drive until it disconnects from
the notebook.
f. Lift the hard drive straight up 2 and remove it from the
hard drive bay.
Removing the Hard Drive
5–8
g. Remove the 4 silver PM2.5×4.0 screws 1 that secure
the hard drive frame to the hard drive.
h. Lift the frame up 2 to remove if from the hard drive.
i. Slide the hard drive connector 3 toward you and
remove it.
Removing the Hard Drive Frame and Connector
Reverse the above procedure to reassemble and install the
hard drive.
5–9
5.4 Notebook Feet
The notebook feet are adhesive-backed rubber pads. The feet are
included in the Miscellaneous Plastics Kits, spare part numbers
382400-001 (for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models) and
382401-001 (for use on Compaq Presario M2000 models). The
feet attach to the base enclosure as illustrated below.
Replacing the Notebook Feet
5–10
5.5 Optical Drive
Optical Drive Spare Part Number Information
8X DVD-ROM Drive
381399-001
381401-001
381403-001
8X DVD-ROM Drive
24X CD-ROM Drive
381400-001
381402-001
381404-001
382395-001
1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3).
2. Remove the hard drive cover (Section 5.3).
5–11
3. Remove the black PM2.0×6.0 screw 1 that secures the
optical drive to the notebook.
Compaq Presario M2000 optical drive is secured by
✎ The
one black PM2.0×7.0 screw.
4. Insert a thin tool, such as a paper clip, into the media tray
release hole 2. (The optical drive media tray releases from
the optical drive.)
5. Use the media tray frame to slide the optical drive to
the right 3.
6. Remove the optical drive.
Removing the Optical Drive
Reverse the above procedure to install an optical drive.
5–12
5.6 Memory Module
Memory Module Spare Part Number Information
512-MB
256-MB
381395-001
381394-001
1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3).
5–13
2. Loosen the 2 black PM2.0×5.0 screws 1 that secure the
memory module compartment cover to the notebook.
3. Lift the rear edge of the memory module compartment cover
up and swing it toward you 2.
4. Remove the memory module compartment cover.
memory module compartment cover is included in the
✎ The
Miscellaneous Plastics Kits, spare part numbers 382400-001
(for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models) and 382401-001 (for
use on Compaq Presario M2000 models).
Removing the Memory Module Compartment Cover
5–14
5. Spread the retaining tabs 1 on each side of the memory
module socket to release the memory module. (The right side
of the module rises away from the notebook.)
6. Slide the module away from the socket at an angle 2.
that memory modules are slotted 3 to prevent incorrect
✎ Note
installation into the memory module socket.
Removing the Memory Module
Reverse the above procedure to install a memory module.
5–15
5.7 Mini PCI Communications Card
Mini PCI Communications Card
802.11b Intel (MOW)
802.11b Intel (ROW)
373047-001
373048-001
373023-001
373024-001
373026-001
373025-001
5–16
2. Loosen the black PM2.0×5.0 screw 1 that secures the
Mini PCI compartment cover to the notebook.
3. Lift the rear edge of the Mini PCI compartment cover up and
then swing it toward you 2.
4. Remove the Mini PCI compartment cover.
Mini PCI compartment cover is included in the
✎ The
Removing the Mini PCI Compartment Cover
5–17
disconnecting the cables, make note of which wireless
✎ Before
antenna cable is attached to which antenna clip on the Mini
PCI communications card.
5. Disconnect the wireless antenna cables 1 from the Mini PCI
communications card.
6. Spread the two retaining tabs 2 that secure the Mini PCI
communications card to the communications compartment
socket. (The front edge of the board rises up).
7. Remove the wireless communications card by pulling the
board away from the socket at a 45-degree angle 3.
PCI communications cards are slotted 4 to prevent
✎ Mini
incorrect installation into the Mini PCI socket.
Removing a Mini PCI Communications Card
Reverse the above procedure to install a Mini PCI
5–18
5.8 Keyboard Cover
Keyboard Cover Spare Part Number Information
For use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models with wireless capability
(includes wireless button and light)
For use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models without wireless
capability (includes wireless button and light)
382406-001
For use on Compaq Presario M2000 models with wireless
For use on Compaq Presario M2000 models without wireless
382407-001
382408-001
382409-001
2. Turn the notebook upside down with the rear panel
toward you.
5–19
3. Remove the 2 silver PM2.0×5.0 screws that secure the
keyboard cover to the notebook.
Removing the Keyboard Cover Screws
5–20
4. Turn the notebook display-side up with the front panel
toward you.
5. Open the notebook as far as possible.
6. Insert a flat blade tool into the keyboard cover notches behind
the f1, f5, f11, and insert keys 1 and lift up 2 until the
keyboard cover disengages from the notebook.
7. Remove the keyboard cover.
Removing the Keyboard Cover
Reverse the above procedure to install the keyboard cover.
5–21
5.9 LED Board
LED Board Spare Part Number Information
382415-001
382907-001
2. Remove the keyboard cover (Section 5.8).
5–22
3. Release the zero insertion force (ZIF) connector to which the
keyboard cable is connected and disconnect the keyboard
cable 1 from the system board.
4. Remove the 2 silver PM2.0×3.0 screws 2 that secure the
LED board to the notebook.
5. Remove the LED board 3.
Removing the LED Board
Reverse the above procedure to install the LED board.
5–23
5.10 Keyboard
Keyboard Spare Part Number Information
Belgium
Brazil
Denmark
France
French Canada
Germany
Greece
Israel
Italy
Korea
Latin America
Europe and the
Netherlands
Norway
367778-A41
367778-201
367778-081
367778-051
367778-121
367778-041
367778-DJ1
367778-BB1
367778-061
367778-AD1
367778-161
367778-331
367778-091
Portugal
Saudi Arabia
Spain
Sweden/Finland
Switzerland
Taiwan
Thailand
United Kingdom
Asia Pacific, Australia,
Canada,
Hong Kong, People’s
Republic
of China, and the
United States
367778-131
367778-171
367778-071
367778-B71
367778-111
367778-AB1
367778-281
367778-031
367778-001
Denmark
France
French Canada
International
Italy
Korea
Latin America
367777-081
367777-051
367777-121
367777-021
367777-061
367777-AD1
367777-161
Norway
Spain
Sweden/Finland
Taiwan
Thailand
United Kingdom
United States
367777-091
367777-071
367777-B71
367777-AB1
367777-281
367777-031
367777-001
5–24
3. Remove the 3 black PM2.0×4.0 screws 1 and the
black PM2.0×6.0 screw 2 that secure the keyboard to
the notebook.
Removing the Keyboard Screws
5–25
4. Lift the rear edge of the keyboard and swing it toward you
until it rests on the palm rest.
Releasing the Keyboard
5–26
5. Release the zero insertion force (ZIF) connector 1 to which
the keyboard cable is connected and disconnect the keyboard
6. Remove the keyboard.
Disconnecting the Keyboard Cable
Reverse the above procedure to install the keyboard.
5–27
5.11 Display Assembly
Display Assembly Spare Part Number Information
15.0-inch, XGA TFT, for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models
(includes wireless antenna boards and cables)
381065-001
15.0-inch, XGA TFT, for use on Compaq Presario M2000
models (includes wireless antenna boards and cables)
381066-001
382417-001
383190-001
Hinge cover (not illustrated; for use only on Compaq Presario
M2000 models)
382418-001
1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3)
and remove the following components:
a. Memory module compartment cover (Section 5.6)
b. Mini PCI compartment cover (Section 5.7)
c. Keyboard cover (Section 5.8)
d. Keyboard (Section 5.10)
5–28
2. Turn the notebook upside down, with the front panel
toward you.
3. Disconnect the wireless antenna cables from the Mini PCI
communications card 1.
4. Remove the cables from the clip 2 in the base enclosure.
Disconnecting and Removing the Wireless Antenna Cables
5–29
5. Turn the notebook display-side up with the front toward you.
6. Open the display.
7. Disconnect the display cable from the system board 1.
8. Remove the wireless antenna cables from the clips 2 in the
top cover.
Disconnecting the Display Cables
5–30
Ä
CAUTION: Support the display assembly when removing the following
screws. Failure to follow this caution can result in damage to the
display assembly.
9 and 10 apply only to HP Pavilion ze2000 models. See
✎ Steps
steps 11 and 12 in this section for information on removing the
display assembly on Compaq Presario M2000 models.
9. Remove the 4 black PM2.0×6.0 screws 1 that secure the
display assembly to the notebook.
10. Remove the display assembly 2.
Removing the Display Assembly Screws,
HP Pavilion ze2000 Models Only
5–31
Ä
display assembly.
11 and 12 apply only to Compaq Presario M2000
✎ Steps
models.
Removing the Display Assembly,
Compaq Presario M2000 Models Only
Reverse the above procedure to install the display assembly.
5–32
5.12 Base Enclosure
Base Enclosure Spare Part Number Information
382398-001
382399-001
a. Optical drive (Section 5.5)
b. Memory module compartment cover (Section 5.6)
c. Mini PCI compartment cover (Section 5.7)
d. Keyboard cover (Section 5.8)
e. Keyboard (Section 5.10)
f. Display assembly (Section 5.11)
2. Position the notebook with the front panel toward you.
5–33
3 through 5 apply only to HP Pavilion ze2000 models.
✎ Steps
See steps 6 through 8 in this section for information on
removing the base enclosure screws on Compaq Presario
M2000 models.
3. Remove the 3 black PM2.0×6.0 screws 1 and the 2 black
PM2.0×4.0 screws 2 that secure the base enclosure to the
notebook.
Removing the Base Enclosure Screws, Part 1,
5–34
toward you.
5. Remove the following:
1 Five PM2.0×16.0 screws that secure the base enclosure
the notebook
2 Seven black PM2.0×6.0 screws that secure the base
enclosure the notebook
3 Six silver PM2.0×5.0 screws that secure the base enclosure
the notebook
5–35
6 through 8 apply only to Compaq Presario M2000
✎ Steps
models.
6. Remove the 2 black PM2.0×7.0 screws 1 and the silver
PM2.0×5.0 screw 2 that secure the base enclosure to
the notebook.
5–36
toward you.
notebook.
5–37
9 and 10 apply to both HP Pavilion ze2000 and
✎ Steps
Compaq Presario M2000 models.
9. Lift the rear edge of the base enclosure 1 until it disengages
from the notebook.
10. Slide the base enclosure back 2 and remove it.
Removing the Base Enclosure
Reverse the above procedure to install the base enclosure.
5–38
5.13 Speaker Assembly
Speaker Assembly Spare Part Number Information
382410-001
383189-001
g. Base enclosure (Section 5.12)
5–39
2. Disconnect the speaker cable 1 from the system board.
3. Lift the speaker straight up to remove it 2 from the top cover.
Removing the Speaker Assembly
Reverse the above procedure to install the speaker assembly.
5–40
5.14 Heat Sink
Heat Sink Spare Part Number Information
382412-001
2. Turn the notebook upside down with the front panel
toward you.
5–41
3. Disconnect the fan cable 1 from the system board.
4. Remove the 3 silver PM2.0×4.0 screws 2 that secure the heat
sink to the top cover.
5. Remove the heat sink 3.
Removing the Heat Sink
Reverse the above procedure to install the heat sink.
5–42
5.15 Fan
Fan Spare Part Number Information
382411-001
h. Heat sink (Section 5.14)
2. Turn the heat sink upside down with the front panel
toward you.
5–43
3. Remove the 2 silver PM2.0×4.0 screws 1 that secure the fan
to the heat sink.
4. Remove the fan 2.
Removing the Fan
Reverse the above procedure to install the fan.
5–44
5.16 Processor
Processor Spare Part Number Information
373053-001
373052-001
367771-001
380690-001
380033-001
380032-001
5–45
2. Turn the processor locking screw 1 one-quarter turn
counterclockwise until you feel a click.
3. Lift the processor 2 straight up and remove it.
that the gold triangle 3 on the processor should be
✎ Note
aligned in the front right corner when you install the processor.
Removing the Processor
Reverse the above procedure to install a processor.
5–46
5.17 Battery Connector Board
Battery Connector Board Spare Part Number Information
382413-001
2. Turn the top cover top-side up with the front panel
toward you.
5–47
3. Remove the silver PM2.0×4.0 screw that secures the battery
connector board to the top cover.
Removing the Battery Connector Board Screw
5–48
4. Turn the top cover upside down, with the front panel
toward you.
5. Remove the silver PM2.0×4.0 screw 1 that secures the
battery connector board to the top cover.
6. Slide the battery connector board toward the rear panel 2
until it disconnects from the system board.
7. Remove the battery connector board 3.
Removing the Battery Connector Board
Reverse the above procedure to install the the battery connector
board.
5–49
5.18 Power Connector Board
Power Connector Board Spare Part Number Information
382414-001
5–50
power connector board to the top cover.
3. Slide the power connector board toward the rear panel 2 until
it disconnects it from the system board.
4. Remove the power connector board 3.
Removing the Power Connector Board
Reverse the above procedure to install the power connector board.
5–51
5.19 USB/S-Video Controller Board
✎ This section applies only to full-featured models.
USB/S-Video Controller Board
382416-001
5–52
USB/S-Video controller board to the top cover.
3. Lift up on the right side of the board 2 to disconnect it from
the system board.
4. Remove the USB/S-Video controller board.
Removing the USB/S-Video Controller Board
Reverse the above procedure to install the USB/S-Video
controller board.
5–53
5.20 Bluetooth Board
Bluetooth Board Spare Part Number Information
Broadcomm Bluetooth board
376651-001
2. Turn the USB/S-Video controller board upside down with the
USB port away from you.
5–54
3. Remove the 2 PM1.5×3.5 screws 1 that secure the
Bluetooth board to the USB/S-Video controller board.
4. Disconnect the Bluetooth board cable 2 from the
USB/S-Video controller board.
5. Remove the Bluetooth board 3.
Removing the Bluetooth Board
Reverse the above procedure to install the Bluetooth board.
5–55
5.21 System Board
System Board Spare Part Number Information
For use on models with full-featured models (includes a disk cell
RTC battery)
381062-001
For use on models with defeatured models (includes a disk cell
RTC battery)
381061-001
✎ All system board spares kits include a disk cell RTC battery.
replacing the system board, ensure that the following
✎ When
components are removed from the defective system board and
installed on the replacement system board:
■ Memory modules (Section 5.6)
■ Mini PCI communications card (Section 5.7)
■ Heat sink (Section 5.14)
■ Processor (Section 5.16)
5–56
1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3) and
remove the following components:
b. Keyboard cover (Section 5.8)
c. Keyboard (Section 5.10)
d. Display assembly (Section 5.11)
e. Base enclosure (Section 5.12)
f. Speaker assembly (Section 5.13)
g. Battery connector board (Section 5.17)
h. Power connector board (Section 5.18)
i. USB/S-Video controller board (Section 5.19)
2. Turn the top cover top-side up, with the front panel
toward you.
5–57
3. Release the ZIF connector 1 to which the TouchPad cable is
connected and disconnect the cable 2 from the system board.
Disconnecting the TouchPad Cable
5–58
4. Turn the top cover upside down with the front toward you.
5 applies only to HP Pavilion ze2000 models. See step 6
✎ Step
in this section for information on removing the system board
screws on Compaq Presario M2000 models.
5. Remove the 2 silver PM2.0×4.0 screws that secure the system
board to the top cover.
Removing the System Board Screws, HP ze2000 Models Only
5–59
✎ Step 6 applies only to Compaq Presario M2000 models.
Removing the System Board Screws,
5–60
7. Flex the left edge of the top cover out 1 until the 1394
connector 2 disengages from the top cover.
8. Lift the left side of the system board 3 until the 1394
connector is clear.
9. Flex the front edge of the top cover 4 until the audio
connectors 5 and LED section 6 of the system board
disengage from the top cover.
Releasing the System Board
5–61
10. Slide the system board to the left at an angle and remove it.
Removing the System Board
Reverse the above procedure to install the system board.
5–62
6
Specifications
This chapter provides physical and performance specifications.
Table 6-1
Notebook
Dimensions
HP Pavilion ze2000
Height (varies from front to back)
Width
Depth
3.01 cm to 3.86 cm
23.46 cm
33.40 cm
1.19 in to 1.52 in
9.24 in
13.15 in
3.29 cm to 3.89 cm
23.06 cm
33.40 cm
1.30 in to 1.53 in
9.08 in
13.15 in
2.44 kg
2.39 kg
5.38 lb
5.26 lb
Width
Depth
Weight (varies by configuration)
HP Pavilion ze2000
Stand-alone power requirements
Operating voltage
Operating current
18.5V dc @ 3.5 A - 65 W
3.5 A
6–1
Specifications
Table 6-1
Notebook (Continued)
Temperature
Operating
Nonoperating
10°C to 35°C
-20°C to 60°C
50°F to 95°F
-4°F to 140°F
Operating
Nonoperating
10% to 90%
5% to 95%, 38.7°C (101.6°F) maximum
wet bulb temperature
Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia)
Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia)
-15 m to 3,048 m
-15 m to 12,192 m
-50 ft to 10,000 ft
-50 ft to 40,000 ft
Shock
Operating
Nonoperating
125 g, 2 ms, half-sine
Random Vibration
Operating
Nonoperating
0.75 g zero-to-peak, 10 Hz to 500 Hz,
0.25 oct/min sweep rate
product safety standards specify thermal limits for plastic
✎ Applicable
surfaces. The notebook operates well within this range of temperatures.
6–2
Specifications
Table 6-2
15.0-inch, XGA, Display
Dimensions
Height
Width
Diagonal
22.9 cm
30.0 cm
38.1 cm
Number of colors
Up to 16.8 million
Contrast ratio
250:1
Brightness
150 nits typical
9.0 in
11.8 in
15.0 in
Pixel resolution
Pitch
Format
Configuration
0.264 × 0.264 mm
1024 × 768
RGB vertical stripe
Backlight
Edge lit
Character display
80 × 25
Total power consumption
5.5 W
Viewing angle
+/-35° horizontal, +15/-35° vertical
typical
6–3
Specifications
Table 6-3
Hard Drives
80-GB*
60-GB*
40-GB*
9.5 mm
70 mm
99 g
9.5 mm
70 mm
102 g
9.5 mm
70 mm
99 g
ATA-5
ATA-5
ATA-5
Synchronous (maximum)
100 MB/sec
100 MB/sec
100 MB/sec
Security
ATA security
ATA security
ATA security
3 ms
13 ms
24 ms
3 ms
13 ms
24 ms
Dimensions
Height
Width
Weight
Interface type
Transfer rate
Seek times (typical read, including setting)
Single track
Average
Maximum
3 ms
13 ms
24 ms
Logical blocks†
156,301,488 117,210,240 78,140,160
Disk rotational speed
4200 rpm
Operating temperature
✎
4200 rpm
4200 rpm
5°C to 55°C (41°F to 131°F)
Certain restrictions and exclusions apply. Consult Customer Care
for details.
*1 GB = 1 billion bytes when referring to hard drive storage capacity. Actual
capacity is less.
†Actual drive specifications may differ slightly.
6–4
Specifications
Table 6-4
Primary 6-cell, Li-Ion Battery Pack
Dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
Weight
2.00 cm
9.40 cm
13.40 cm
0.34 kg
0.79 in
3.70 in
5.28 in
0.75 lb
Energy
Voltage
Amp-hour capacity
Watt-hour capacity
11.1 V
4.4 Ah
48 Wh
Temperature
Operating
Nonoperating
5°C to 45°C
0°C to 60°C
41°F to 113°F
32°F to 140°F
6–5
Specifications
Table 6-5
Applicable disk
Read:
Write:
DVD-R, DVD-RW,
CD-R and CD-RW
DVD-ROM (DVD-5,
DVD-9, DVD-10,
DVD-18),
CD-ROM (Mode 1 and 2)
CD Digital Audio
CD-XA ready (Mode 2,
Form 1 and 2)
CD-I ready (Mode 2,
Form 1 and 2)
CD-R, CD-RW
Photo CD (single and
multisession)
CD-Bridge
Center hole diameter
1.5 cm (0.59 in)
Disk diameter
Standard disc
Mini disc
6–6
12 cm (4.72 in)
8 cm (3.15 in)
Specifications
Table 6-5
24X DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive (Continued)
Disk thickness
1.2 mm (0.047 in)
Track pitch
0.74 µm
Access time
CD media
DVD media
< 110 ms
< 210 ms
< 130 ms
< 225 ms
Random
Full stroke
Audio output level
Line-out, 0.7 V rms
Cache buffer
2 MB
Data transfer rate
CD-R (24X)
CD-RW (10X)
CD-ROM (24X)
DVD (8X)
Multiword DMA mode 2
3600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate)
10,800 KB/s (1352 KB/s at 1X DVD rate)
16.6 MB/s
Startup time
< 15 seconds
Stop time
< 6 seconds
6–7
Specifications
Table 6-6
Applicable disk
Read:
DVD-R, DVD-RW,
DVD-ROM (DVD-5,
DVD-9, DVD-10,
DVD-18),
CD-ROM (Mode 1
and 2)
CD Digital Audio
CD-XA ready (Mode
2, Form 1 and 2)
CD-I ready (Mode 2,
Form 1 and 2)
CD-R, CD-RW
Photo CD (single
and multisession)
CD-Bridge
1.5 cm (0.59 in)
Write:
CD-R and CD-RW
DVD-R and
DVD-RW
Disk diameter
Standard disc
Mini disc
6–8
12 cm (4.72 in)
8 cm (3.15 in)
Specifications
Table 6-6
8X DVD±RW/R and CD-RW Combo Drive (Continued)
Disk thickness
1.2 mm (0.047 in)
Track pitch
0.74 µm
Access time
CD
DVD
< 175 ms
< 285 ms
< 230 ms
< 335 ms
Random
Full stroke
Audio output level
Audio-out, 0.7 Vrms
Cache buffer
2 MB
Data transfer rate
CD-R (16X)
CD-RW (8X)
CD-ROM (24X)
DVD (8X)
DVD-R (4X)
DVD-RW (2X)
2,400 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate)
10,800 KB/s (1,352 KB/s at 1X DVD rate)
16.6 MB/s
Startup time
< 15 seconds
Stop time
< 6 seconds
6–9
Specifications
Table 6-7
8X DVD-ROM Drive
Applicable disk
DVD-ROM (DVD-5, DVD-9, DVD-10, DVD-18)
CD Digital Audio
CD-XA ready (Mode 2, Form 1 and 2)
CD-I ready (Mode 2, Form 1 and 2)
CD-R
CD-RW
Photo CD (single and multisession)
CD-Bridge
1.5 cm (0.59 in)
Disk diameter
Standard disc
Mini disc
Disk thickness
6–10
12 cm (4.72 in)
8 cm (3.15 in)
1.2 mm (0.047 in)
Specifications
Table 6-7
8X DVD-ROM Drive (Continued)
Track pitch
0.74 µm
Access time
CD media
DVD media
< 100 ms
< 175 ms
< 125 ms
< 225 ms
Random
Full stroke
Audio output level
Line-out, 0.7 V rms
Cache buffer
512 KB
Data transfer rate
CD-R (24X)
CD-RW (10X)
CD-ROM (24X)
DVD (8X)
16.6 MB/s
Startup time
< 10 seconds
Stop time
< 3 seconds
6–11
Specifications
Table 6-8
24X CD-ROM Drive
Applicable disk
Applicable disc CD-ROM (Mode 1 and 2)
CD Digital Audio
CD-R
CD-RW
Photo CD (single/multisession)
CD-Bridge
1.5 cm (0.59 in)
Disk diameter
Standard disc
Mini disc
12 cm (4.72 in)
8 cm (3.15 in)
Disk thickness
1.2 mm (0.047 in)
Track pitch
1.6 µm
Access time
CD media
DVD media
< 110 ms
< 220 ms
< 125 ms
< 225 ms
Random
Full stroke
Audio output level
Line-out, 0.7 V rms
Cache buffer
128 KB/s
Data transfer rate
CD-R (24X)
16.6 MB/s
Startup time
< 8 seconds
Stop time
< 4 seconds
6–12
Specifications
Table 6-9
System DMA
Hardware DMA
System Function
DMA0
n/a
DMA1*
n/a
DMA2*
n/a
DMA3
n/a
DMA4
Direct memory access controller
DMA5*
Available for PC Card
DMA6
Not assigned
DMA7
Not assigned
*PC Card controller can use DMA 1, 2, or 5.
Table 6-10
System Interrupts
Hardware IRQ
System Function
IRQ0
System timer
IRQ1
Standard 101-/102-Key or Microsoft Natural Keyboard
IRQ2
Cascaded
IRQ3
Intel 82801DB/DBM USB2 Enhanced Host
Controller—24CD
IRQ4
COM1
IRQ5*
Conexant AC—Link Audio
Intel 82801DB/DBM SMBus Controller—24C3
Data Fax Modem with SmartCP
IRQ6
Diskette drive
6–13
Specifications
Table 6-10
System Interrupts (Continued)
IRQ7*
Parallel port
IRQ8
System CMOS/real time clock
IRQ9*
Microsoft ACPI-compliant system
IRQ10*
Intel USB UHCI controller—24C2
Intel 82852/82855 GM/GME Graphic Controller
Realtek RTL8139 Family PCI fast Ethernet Controller
IRQ11
Intel USB EHCI controller—24CD
Intel Pro/Wireless 2200BG
TI OHCI 1394 host controller
TI PCI1410 cardbus controller
IRQ12
Synaptics PS/2 touch pad
IRQ13
Numeric data processor
IRQ14
Primary IDE channel
IRQ15
Secondary IDE channel
*Default configuration; audio possible configurations are IRQ5, IRQ7, IRQ9,
IRQ10, or none.
Cards may assert IRQ3, IRQ4, IRQ5, IRQ7, IRQ9, IRQ10, IRQ11, or
✎ PC
IRQ15. Either the infrared or the serial port may assert IRQ3 or IRQ4.
6–14
Specifications
Table 6-11
System I/O Addresses
I/O Address (hex)
System Function (shipping configuration)
000 - 00F
DMA controller no. 1
010 - 01F
Unused
020 - 021
Interrupt controller no. 1
022 - 024
Opti chipset configuration registers
025 - 03F
Unused
02E - 02F
87334 “Super I/O” configuration for CPU
040 - 05F
Counter/timer registers
044 - 05F
Unused
060
Keyboard controller
061
Port B
062 - 063
Unused
064
Keyboard controller
065 - 06F
Unused
070 - 071
NMI enable/RTC
072 - 07F
Unused
080 - 08F
DMA page registers
090 - 091
Unused
092
Port A
093 - 09F
Unused
0A0 - 0A1
6–15
Specifications
Table 6-11
System I/O Addresses (Continued)
I/O Address (hex)
0A2 - 0BF
Unused
0C0 - 0DF
0E0 - 0EF
Unused
0F0 - 0F1
Coprocessor busy clear/reset
0F2 - 0FF
Unused
100 - 16F
Unused
170 - 177
Secondary fixed disk controller
178 - 1EF
Unused
1F0 - 1F7
Primary fixed disk controller
1F8 - 200
Unused
201
Joystick (decoded in ESS1688)
202 - 21F
Unused
220 - 22F
Entertainment audio
230 - 26D
Unused
26E - 26
Unused
278 - 27F
Unused
280 - 2AB
Unused
2A0 - 2A7
Unused
2A8 - 2E7
Unused
2E8 - 2EF
Reserved serial port
6–16
Specifications
Table 6-11
I/O Address (hex)
2F0 - 2F7
Unused
2F8 - 2FF
Infrared port
300 - 31F
Unused
320 - 36F
Unused
370 - 377
Secondary diskette drive controller
378 - 37F
Parallel port (LPT1/default)
380 - 387
Unused
388 - 38B
FM synthesizer—OPL3
38C - 3AF
Unused
3B0 - 3BB
VGA
3BC - 3BF
Reserved (parallel port/no EPP support)
3C0 - 3DF
VGA
3E0 - 3E1
PC Card controller in CPU
3E2 - 3E3
Unused
3E8 - 3EF
Internal modem
3F0 - 3F7
“A” diskette controller
3F8 - 3FF
Serial port (COM1/default)
CF8 - CFB
PCI configuration index register (PCIDIVO-1)
CFC - CFF
PCI configuration data register (PCIDIVO-1)
6–17
Specifications
Table 6-12
System Memory Map
Size
Memory Address
System Function
640 KB
00000000-0009FFFF
Base memory
128 KB
000A0000-000BFFFF
Video memory
48 KB
000C0000-000CBFFF
Video BIOS
160 KB
000C8000-000E7FFF
Unused
64 KB
000E8000-000FFFFF
System BIOS
15 MB
00100000-00FFFFFF
Extended memory
58 MB
01000000-047FFFFF
Super extended memory
58 MB
04800000-07FFFFFF
Unused
2 MB
08000000-080FFFFF
Video memory (direct access)
4 GB
08200000-FFFEFFFF
Unused
64 KB
FFFF0000-FFFFFFFF
System BIOS
6–18
A
Connector Pin Assignments
Table A-1
Universal Serial Bus
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
+5 VDC
3
Data +
2
Data –
4
Ground
A–1
Table A-2
RJ-45 (Network)
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
Transmit +
5
Unused
2
Transmit –
6
Receive –
3
Receive +
7
Unused
4
Unused
8
Unused
A–2
Table A-3
S-Video-Out
1
2
3
4 56
7
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
S-VHS color (C) signal
5
TV-CD
2
Composite video signal
6
S-VHS intensity ground
3
S-VHS intensity (Y) signal
7
Composite video ground
4
S-VHS color ground
A–3
Table A-4
External Monitor
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
Red analog
9
+5 VDC
2
Green analog
10
Ground
3
Blue analog
11
Monitor detect
4
Not connected
12
DDC 2B data
5
Ground
13
Horizontal sync
6
Ground analog
14
Vertical sync
7
Ground analog
15
DDC 2B clock
8
Ground analog
A–4
Table A-5
RJ-11 (Modem)
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
Unused
4
Unused
2
Tip
5
Unused
3
Ring
6
Unused
A–5
Table A-6
Audio-In (Microphone)
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
Audio signal in
3
Ground
2
Audio signal in
Table A-7
Audio-Out (Headphone)
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
Audio out, left channel
3
Ground
2
Audio out, right channel
A–6
B
Power Cord Set Requirements
3-Conductor Power Cord Set
The wide range input feature of the notebook permits it to operate
from any line voltage from 100 to 120 or 220 to 240 volts AC.
The power cord set included with the notebook meets the
requirements for use in the country where the equipment
is purchased.
Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the
requirements of the country where the notebook is used.
B–1
General Requirements
The requirements listed below are applicable to all countries.
B–2
■
The length of the power cord set must be at least 1.5 m
(5.0 ft) and a maximum of 2.0 m (6.5 ft).
■
All power cord sets must be approved by an acceptable
accredited agency responsible for evaluation in the
country where the power cord set will be used.
■
The power cord sets must have a minimum current capacity
of 10 amps and a nominal voltage rating of 125 or 250 V AC,
as required by each country’s power system.
■
The appliance coupler must meet the mechanical
configuration of an EN 60 320/IEC 320 Standard Sheet C13
connector for mating with the appliance inlet on the back of
the notebook.
Country-Specific Requirements
3-Conductor Power Cord Set Requirements
Country
Accredited Agency
Applicable Note Number
Australia
EANSW
1
Austria
OVE
1
Belgium
CEBC
1
Canada
CSA
2
Denmark
DEMKO
1
Finland
FIMKO
1
France
UTE
1
Germany
VDE
1
Italy
IMQ
1
Japan
METI
3
✎ NOTES:
1. The flexible cord must be <HAR> Type HO5VV-F, 3-conductor, 1.0 mm²
conductor size. Power cord set fittings (appliance coupler and wall plug)
must bear the certification mark of the agency responsible for evaluation
in the country where it will be used.
2. The flexible cord must be Type SPT-3 or equivalent, No. 18 AWG,
3-conductor. The wall plug must be a two-pole grounding type with a
NEMA 5-15P (15 A, 125 V) or NEMA 6-15P (15 A, 250 V) configuration.
3. The appliance coupler, flexible cord, and wall plug must bear a “T” mark
and registration number in accordance with the Japanese Dentori Law. The
flexible cord must be Type VCT or VCTF, 3-conductor, 1.00 mm² conductor
size. The wall plug must be a two-pole grounding type with a Japanese
Industrial Standard C8303 (7 A, 125 V) configuration.
B–3
3-Conductor Power Cord Set Requirements (Continued)
Country
Accredited Agency
The Netherlands
KEMA
1
Norway
NEMKO
1
Sweden
SEMKO
1
Switzerland
SEV
1
United Kingdom
BSI
1
United States
UL
2
✎ NOTES:
B–4
C
Screw Listing
This appendix provides specification and reference information
for the screws used in the notebook. All screws listed in this
appendix are available in the Miscellaneous Screw Kits, spare
part numbers 382402-001 (for use on HP Pavilion ze2000
models) and 382403-001 (for use on Compaq Presario M2000
models).
C–1
Screw Listing
Table C-1
Black PM2.0×5.0 Screw
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Black
5
5.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
1 Two screws that secure the hard drive cover to the notebook (screws
are captured on the cover by C clips; documented in Section 5.3)
2 Two screws that secure the memory module compartment cover to
the notebook (screws are captured on the cover by C clips; documented in
Section 5.6)
3 One screw that secures the Mini PCI compartment cover to the notebook
(screw is captured on the cover by C clips; documented in Section 5.7)
Black PM2.0×5.0 Screw Locations
C–2
Screw Listing
Table C-2
Silver PM2.5×4.0 Screw
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Silver
4
4.0 mm
2.5 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
4 screws that secure the hard drive frame to the hard drive (documented in
Section 5.3)
Silver PM2.5×4.0 Screw Locations
C–3
Screw Listing
Table C-3
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Black
22
6.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
1 One screw that secures the optical drive to the notebook (documented in
Section 5.5)
2 Seven screws that secure the base enclosure on the HP Pavilion ze2000
notebook (documented in Section 5.12)
C–4
Screw Listing
Table C-3
Black PM2.0×6.0 Screw (Continued)
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Black
22
6.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
1 One screw that secures the keyboard to the notebook (documented in
Section 5.10)
2 Four screws that secure the display assembly on the HP Pavilion ze2000
C–5
Screw Listing
Table C-3
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Black
22
6.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
6 screws that secure the display assembly on the Compaq Presario M2000
C–6
Screw Listing
Table C-3
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Black
22
6.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
3 screws that secure the base enclosure to the notebook (documented in
Section 5.12)
C–7
Screw Listing
Table C-4
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Black
18
7.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
1 screw that secures the optical drive on the Compaq Presario M2000 notebook
(documented in Section 5.5)
C–8
Screw Listing
Table C-4
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Black
18
7.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
2 screws that secure the base enclosure on the Compaq Presario M2000
C–9
Screw Listing
Table C-4
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Black
18
7.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
C–10
Screw Listing
Table C-5
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Silver
9
5.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
1 Two screws that secure the keyboard cover to the notebook (documented in
Section 5.10)
2 Six screws that secure the base enclosure on the HP Pavilion ze2000
C–11
Screw Listing
Table C-5
Silver PM2.0×5.0 Screw (Continued)
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Silver
9
5.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
1 screw that secures the base enclosure to the notebook (documented in
Section 5.12)
C–12
Screw Listing
Table C-6
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Silver
2
3.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
2 screws that secure the LED board to the notebook (documented in
Section 5.9)
C–13
Screw Listing
Table C-7
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Black
8
4.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
3 screws that secure the keyboard to the notebook (documented in
Section 5.10)
C–14
Screw Listing
Table C-7
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Black
8
4.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
Section 5.12)
C–15
Screw Listing
Table C-7
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Black
8
4.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
C–16
Screw Listing
Table C-8
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Black
5
16.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
5 screws that secure the base enclosure on the HP Pavilion ze2000 notebook
C–17
Screw Listing
Table C-9
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Silver
16
4.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
1 Three screws that secure the heat sink on the HP Pavilion ze2000 notebook
2 One screw that secures the battery connector board to the notebook
3 Two screws that secure the power connector board to the notebook
4 Two screws that secure the USB/S-Video controller board to the notebook
C–18
Screw Listing
Table C-9
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Silver
16
4.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
2 screws that secure the fan to the heat sink (documented in Section 5.15)
C–19
Screw Listing
Table C-9
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Silver
16
4.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
1 screw that secures the battery connector board to notebook (documented in
Section 5.17)
C–20
Screw Listing
Table C-9
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Silver
16
4.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
2 screws that secure the system board on the HP Pavilion ze2000 notebook
C–21
Screw Listing
Table C-9
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Silver
16
4.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
3 screws that secure the system board on the Compaq Presario M2000
C–22
Screw Listing
Table C-10
Phillips PM1.5×3.5 Screw
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Silver
2
3.5 mm
1.5 mm
3.0 mm
Where used:
2 screws that secure the Bluetooth board to the notebook (documented in
Section 5.20)
C–23
Index
1394 port 1–10, 1–12
light 1–10, 1–24
slot 1–10
6-in-1 Memory Reader light
1–12, 1–26
6-in-1 Memory Reader slot
1–12
A
AC adapter, spare part number
3–16, 3–20
arrow keys 1–20, 1–22
audio troubleshooting 2–21
audio-in jack
location 1–6, 1–8
pin assignments A–6
audio-out jack
B
base enclosure
removal 5–33
spare part numbers 3–9,
3–23, 5–33
battery bay 1–17, 1–18, 1–27,
1–29
battery connector board
removal 5–47
spare part number 3–7,
3–23, 5–47
battery light 1–6, 1–8
battery pack
removal 5–6
3–18, 5–6
specifications 6–5
1–27, 1–29
Bluetooth board
removal 5–54
3–21, 5–54
bottom components 1–27,
1–29
C
cables, service considerations
4–2
caps lock key 1–20, 1–22
caps lock light 1–23, 1–25
Index–1
Index
CD-ROM drive
OS loading problems 2–20
precautions 4–3
removal 5–11
3–15, 3–22, 5–11
components
bottom 1–27, 1–29
front 1–5, 1–7
keyboard 1–19, 1–21
left-side 1–13, 1–15
rear 1–15, 1–17, 1–18
right-side 1–9, 1–11
top 1–23, 1–25
Computer Setup
Advanced Menu 2–4
Main Menu 2–2
overview 2–1
Security Menu 2–3
Tools Menu 2–4
connector pin assignments
audio-in A–6
audio-out A–6
external monitor A–4
headphone A–6
microphone A–6
modem A–5
monitor A–4
network A–2
RJ-11 A–5
RJ-45 A–2
S-Video-out A–3
Universal Serial Bus (USB)
A–1
Index–2
connectors, service
D
design overview 1–31
disassembly sequence chart
5–3
diskette drive
precautions 4–3
display assembly
removal 5–28
3–22, 5–28
display hinge brackets, spare
part numbers 3–3, 3–24,
5–28
display release button 1–6, 1–8
display switch 1–23, 1–25
DMA specifications 6–13
docking device,
drives, preventing damage 4–3
DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive
precautions 4–3
removal 5–11
3–15, 3–22, 5–11
DVD±RW/R and CD-RW
Combo Drive
precautions 4–3
removal 5–11
Index
3–15, 3–22, 5–11
DVD-ROM drive
precautions 4–3
removal 5–11
3–15, 3–22, 5–11
E
electrostatic discharge 4–4,
4–8
entertainment cable, spare part
number 3–16, 3–21
exhaust vents 1–17, 1–18,
1–28, 1–30
expansion port 2 1–14, 1–16
external monitor port
F
fan
removal 5–43
3–23, 5–43
features 1–2
feet
illustrated 3–12
locations 5–10
flowcharts, troubleshooting
no audio 2–21, 2–22
no network/modem
connection 2–26
no OS loading 2–15
no OS loading from
diskette drive 2–19
no OS loading from hard
drive 2–16, 2–17, 2–18
no OS loading from optical
drive 2–20
no power 2–8, 2–10, 2–11
no video 2–12, 2–13
nonfunctioning device
2–23
nonfunctioning docking
device 2–14
nonfunctioning keyboard
2–24
nonfunctioning pointing
device 2–25
fn key 1–20, 1–22
front components 1–5, 1–7
function keys 1–20, 1–22
G
grounding equipment and
methods 4–6
H
hard drive
precautions 4–3
removal 5–7
3–15, 3–22, 5–7
hard drive bay 1–28, 1–30
hard drive cover
illustrated 3–12
removal 5–7
Index–3
Index
headphone jack
heat sink
removal 5–41
3–23, 5–41
hinge cover, spare part
numbers 3–3, 3–24, 5–28
I
I/O address specifications
6–15
interrupt specifications 6–13
K
keyboard
removal 5–24
3–18, 3–19, 3–20, 5–24
keyboard components 1–19,
1–21
keyboard cover
removal 5–19
3–23, 5–19
keypad keys 1–20, 1–22
L
label area 1–28, 1–30
LED board
removal 5–22
3–24, 5–22
Index–4
left-side components 1–13,
1–15
Logo Kit, spare part numbers
3–16, 3–23
M
mass storage devices, spare
part numbers 3–14
memory map specifications
6–18
memory module
removal 5–13
3–22, 5–13
memory module compartment
1–27, 1–29
cover
illustrated 3–12
removal 5–14
microphone jack
Mini PCI communications
card
removal 5–16
3–20
Mini PCI compartment 1–28,
1–30
illustrated 3–12
removal 5–17
Index
components 3–12
contents 3–13, 3–23
3–13, 3–23
modem jack
modem, troubleshooting 2–26
monitor port 1–14, 1–16
mouse, spare part number
3–16, 3–18
N
network jack
network, troubleshooting 2–26
nonfunctioning device,
troubleshooting 2–14, 2–23
notebook feet
illustrated 3–12
locations 5–10
notebook specifications 6–1
num lock key 1–20, 1–22
O
optical drive
location 1–10, 1–12, 1–28,
1–30
precautions 4–3
removal 5–11
3–15, 3–22
specifications 6–6, 6–8,
6–10, 6–12
P
packing precautions 4–5
PC Card eject buttons 1–14,
1–16
PC Card slots 1–14, 1–16
plastic parts 4–2
pointing device,
power button 1–24, 1–26
power connector 1–14, 1–16
power connector board
removal 5–50
3–23, 5–50
power cord
set requirements B–2
3–20, 3–21
power management features
1–5
power, troubleshooting 2–8
power/standby light 1–6, 1–8
processor
removal 5–45
3–18, 3–20, 3–21, 5–45
R
rear components 1–15, 1–17,
1–18
remote control, spare part
number 3–16, 3–20
Index–5
Index
removal/replacement
preliminaries 4–1
procedures 5–1
right-side components 1–9,
1–11
RJ-11 jack
RJ-45 jack
S
Screw Kit, spare part number
3–16, 3–23
screw listing C–1
security cable slot 1–10, 1–12
serial number 3–1, 5–2
service considerations 4–2
speaker assembly
removal 5–39
3–23, 3–24, 5–39
speakers 1–6, 1–8
specifications
battery pack 6–5
CD-ROM drive 6–12
display 6–3
DMA 6–13
DVD/CD-RW Combo
Drive 6–6
DVD±RW/R and CD-RW
Combo Drive 6–8
DVD-ROM drive 6–10
hard drive 6–4
I/O addresses 6–15
Index–6
interrupts 6–13
memory map 6–18
notebook 6–1
optical drive 6–12
static shielding materials 4–8
S-Video-out jack
system board
removal 5–56
3–21, 5–56
system memory map 6–18
T
tools required 4–1
top components 1–23, 1–25
top cover, spare part numbers
3–7, 3–22, 3–23, 3–24
TouchPad buttons 1–23, 1–25
TouchPad horizontal scroll
region 1–26
TouchPad vertical scroll
region 1–24, 1–26
transporting precautions 4–5
troubleshooting
audio 2–21
Computer Setup 2–1
docking device 2–14
flowcharts 2–5
keyboard 2–24
modem 2–26
network 2–26
2–14, 2–23
Index
OS loading 2–15
overview 2–1
power 2–8
video 2–12
U
port
location 1–10, 1–12, 1–14,
1–16
USB digital drive, spare part
number 3–15
USB travel mouse, spare part
number 3–16, 3–18
removal 5–52
3–24, 5–52
V
video troubleshooting 2–12
volume button 1–24, 1–26
W
1–20, 1–22
Windows logo key 1–20, 1–22
wireless light 1–6, 1–8, 1–26
workstation precautions 4–6
Y
Y-cable, spare part number
3–16, 3–21
Index–7
Maintenance and Service
Guide
February 2005
This guide is a troubleshooting reference used for maintaining
and servicing the notebook. It provides comprehensive
information on identifying notebook features, components, and
spare parts; troubleshooting notebook problems; and performing
notebook disassembly procedures.
Corporation. Intel, Pentium, and Celeron are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and
other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used
by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. SD Logo is a trademark of its
proprietor.
First Edition: February 2005
Contents
1 Product Description
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
Resetting the Notebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
Power Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
External Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
Design Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–31
2 Troubleshooting
2.1 Computer Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.2 Troubleshooting Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
3 Illustrated Parts Catalog
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Serial Number Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
Notebook Major Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
Miscellaneous Plastics Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12
Mass Storage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–14
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16
Sequential Part Number Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–18
4 Removal and Replacement Preliminaries
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preventing Damage to Removable Drives . . . . . . . .
Preventing Electrostatic Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Packaging and Transporting Precautions . . . . . . . . .
Workstation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding Equipment and Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–1
4–2
4–3
4–4
4–5
4–6
4–6
iii
Contents
5 Removal and Replacement Procedures
5.1 Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5.2 Disassembly Sequence Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5.3 Preparing the Notebook for Disassembly . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.4 Notebook Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–10
5.5 Optical Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11
5.6 Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13
5.7 Mini PCI Communications Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–16
5.8 Keyboard Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–19
5.9 LED Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–22
5.10 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–24
5.11 Display Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–28
5.12 Base Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–33
5.13 Speaker Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–39
5.14 Heat Sink. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–41
5.15 Fan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–43
5.16 Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–45
5.17 Battery Connector Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–47
5.18 Power Connector Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–50
5.19 USB/S-Video Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–52
5.20 Bluetooth Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–54
5.21 System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–56
6 Specifications
A Connector Pin Assignments
B Power Cord Set Requirements
C Screw Listing
Index
iv
1
Product Description
The HP Pavilion ze2000 Notebook PC 1 and the
Compaq Presario M2000 Notebook PC 2 offer advanced
modularity, Intel® Mobile Pentium® M and Celeron®
processors, and extensive multimedia support.
HP Pavilion ze2000 and Compaq Presario M2000
1–1
Product Description
1.1 Features
references are made throughout this Maintenance and
✎ Numerous
Service Guide to “full-featured” and “defeatured” notebook
models. A model is considered to be full-featured if it has
3 Universal Serial Bus ports and the following components:
■ S-Video-out jack
■ Expansion port 2
■ 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader slot or 6-in-1 Memory Reader
slot
A notebook model is considered to be defeatured if it has only
2 Universal Serial Bus ports and none of the components in the
preceding list.
■
The following processors are available, varying by
notebook model:
❏ Intel Pentium M 745 (1.8-GHz) with 400-MHz
front side bus (FSB)
❏ Intel Pentium M 715A (1.5-GHz) with 400-MHz FSB
models feature both Intel Pentium M and
✎ Full-featured
Celeron M processors. Defeatured models feature only
Celeron M processors.
1–2
■
15.0-inch XGA (1024 × 768) TFT display with over
16.7 million colors
■
80-, 60-, or 40-GB high-capacity hard drive, varying by
notebook model
Product Description
■
256-MB DDR2 synchronous DRAM (SDRAM) at 400 MHz,
expandable to 1.0 GB
■
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition or Windows XP
Professional, varying by notebook model
■
Full-size Windows keyboard with embedded numeric keypad
■
TouchPad pointing device with on button and dedicated
vertical scroll region
■
Integrated 10Base-T/100 Base-TX Ethernet local area
network (LAN) network interface card (NIC) with RJ-45 jack
■
Integrated high-speed 56K modem with RJ-11 jack
■
Integrated wireless support for Mini PCI IEEE 802.11b and
802.11b/g WLAN device
■
Support for one Type II PC Card slot, with support for both
32-bit (CardBus) and 16-bit PC Cards
■
External 65-watt AC adapter with 3-wire power cord
■
6-cell or 12-cell Li-Ion battery pack
■
Stereo speakers with volume up and down buttons
■
Support for the following optical drives:
❏ 8X DVD-ROM Drive
❏ 24X DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive
❏ 8X DVD±RW/R and CD-RW Combo Drive
❏ 24X CD-ROM Drive (Compaq Presario M2000
notebooks only)
■
Connectors:
❏ External monitor port
❏ Universal Serial Bus (USB) v. 2.0 (up to 3 ports)
❏ RJ-11 (modem) jack
❏ RJ-45 (network) jack
❏ Audio-out (headphone) jack
1–3
Product Description
❏ Audio-in (microphone) jack
❏ Power
❏ IEEE 1394 digital port
❏ S-Video-out jack (select models only)
❏ Expansion port 2
❏ 6-in-1 Digital Media Reader slot (select models only)
❏ 6-in-1 Memory Reader slot (select models only)
1.2 Resetting the Notebook
If the notebook you are servicing has an unknown password,
follow these steps to clear the password. These steps also
clear CMOS:
1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3,
“Preparing the Notebook for Disassembly,” for more
information).
2. Remove the real time clock (RTC) battery (refer to
Section 5.21, “System Board,” for more information).
3. Wait approximately 5 minutes.
4. Replace the RTC battery and reassemble the notebook.
5. Connect AC power to the notebook. Do not reinsert any
battery packs at this time.
6. Turn on the notebook.
All passwords and all CMOS settings have been cleared.
1–4
Product Description
1.3 Power Management
The notebook comes with power management features that
extend battery operating time and conserve power. The
notebook supports the following power management features:
■
Standby
■
Hibernation
■
Setting customization by the user
■
Hotkeys for setting the level of performance
■
Battery calibration
■
Lid switch standby/resume
■
■
Advanced Configuration and Power Management (ACPM)
compliance
1.4 External Components
The external components on the front of the HP Pavilion ze2000
Front Components, HP Pavilion ze2000
1–5
Product Description
Table 1-1
Front Components
HP Pavilion ze2000
Item
Component
Function
1
Speakers (2)
2
models only)
turned on.
3
Power/standby light
4
5
Battery light
not inserted.
6
Opens the notebook.
7
Audio-in
(microphone) jack
8
Audio-out
(headphone) jack
1–6
Product Description
The external components on the front of the Compaq Presario
Front Components, Compaq Presario M2000
1–7
Product Description
Table 1-2
Front Components
Item
Component
Function
1
Speakers (2)
2
models only)
Bluetooth device (select models only), are
turned on.
3
Power/standby light
4
5
Battery light
not inserted.
6
Opens the notebook.
7
Audio-in
(microphone) jack
8
Audio-out
(headphone) jack
1–8
Product Description
The external components on the right side of the HP Pavilion
Right-Side Components, HP Pavilion ze2000
1–9
Product Description
Table 1-3
HP Pavilion ze2000
Item
Component
Function
1
USB ports (1 or 2
depending on the
notebook model)
Connect an optional USB device.
2
Reader slot
3
1394 port
camcorder.
4
Reader light
accessed.
5
Optical drive
6
S-Video-out jack
7
Security cable slot
notebook.
Ä
1–10
Product Description
The external components on the right side of the Compaq
Presario M2000 notebook are shown below and described in
Table 1-4.
Right-Side Components, Compaq Presario M2000
1–11
Product Description
Table 1-4
Item
Component
Function
1
USB ports (1 or 2
depending on the
notebook model)
2
slot (select models
only)
3
1394 port (select
models only)
camcorder.
4
only)
accessed.
5
Optical drive
6
S-Video-out jack
7
Security cable slot
notebook.
Ä
1–12
Product Description
The external components on the left side of the HP Pavilion
Left-Side Components, HP Pavilion ze2000
1–13
Product Description
Table 1-5
HP Pavilion ze2000
Item
Component
Function
1
Power connector
2
Monitor port
projector.
3
Expansion port 2*
docking device.
4
RJ-45 jack
5
RJ-11 jack
6
USB port
7
PC Card slot
8
PC Card slot.
1–14
Product Description
The external components on the left side of the Compaq Presario
Left-Side Components, Compaq Presario M2000
1–15
Product Description
Table 1-6
Item
Component
Function
1
Power connector
2
Monitor port
projector.
3
Expansion port 2*
docking device.
4
5
RJ-11 (modem) jack
6
USB port
7
PC Card slot
8
PC Card slot.
1–16
Product Description
The external components on the rear panel of the HP Pavilion
Rear Panel Components, HP Pavilion ze2000
Table 1-7
HP Pavilion ze2000
Item
Component
Function
1
Battery bay
2
Exhaust vent
components.
Ä
1–17
Product Description
The external components on the rear panel of the Compaq
Presario M2000 notebook are shown below and described
in Table 1-8.
Rear Panel Components, Compaq Presario M2000
Table 1-8
Item
Component
Function
1
Battery bay
2
Exhaust vent
components.
Ä
1–18
Product Description
The notebook keyboard components on the HP Pavilion ze2000
Keyboard Components, HP Pavilion ze2000
1–19
Product Description
Table 1-9
Keyboard Components
HP Pavilion ze2000
Item
Component
Function
1
Function keys (12)
When combined with the fn key, several
keys perform additional tasks as hotkeys.
2
caps lock key
lock light.
3
fn key
4
Windows logo key
5
Windows
applications key
6
Arrow keys
Moves the cursor around the screen.
7
Keypad keys (15)
numeric keypad.
8
num lock key
On: Enables numeric lock, turns on the
embedded numeric keypad, and turns on
the num lock light.
1–20
Product Description
The notebook keyboard components on the Compaq Presario
Keyboard Components, Compaq Presario M2000
1–21
Product Description
Table 1-10
Keyboard Components
Item
Component
Function
1
Function keys (12)
When combined with the Fn key, the
function keys perform additional tasks as
hotkeys.
2
caps lock key
lock light.
3
Fn key
Fn+F7 decreases screen brightness.
4
Windows logo key
5
Windows
applications key
6
Arrow keys
Move the cursor around the screen.
7
Keypad keys (15)
numeric keypad.
8
num lock key
Enables numeric lock, turns on the
embedded numeric keypad, and turns
on the num lock light.
1–22
Product Description
The notebook top components on the HP Pavilion ze2000
Top Components, HP Pavilion ze2000
Table 1-11
Top Components
HP Pavilion ze2000
Item
Component
Function
1
Left and right
TouchPad buttons
external mouse.
2
TouchPad
Moves the pointer.
3
Caps lock light
4
Display switch
standby.
1–23
Product Description
Table 1-11
Top Components
Item
Component
Function
5
from standby.
from hibernation.
✎ IfandtheWindows
shutdown procedures
notebook.
6
Volume down button
7
Volume mute button
Mute light
8
Volume up button
9
Wireless button (select
models only)
Turns the wireless functionality on or off but
does not create a wireless connection.
establish a wireless connection,
✎ To
a wireless network must already be
set up.
10
Num lock light
is on.
11
Reader light
accessed.
12
TouchPad vertical
scrolling region
1–24
Product Description
The top components on the Compaq Presario M2000 notebook
are shown below and described in Table 1-12.
Top Components, Compaq Presario M2000
Table 1-12
Top Components
Item
Component
Function
1
Left and right
TouchPad buttons
external mouse.
2
TouchPad
Moves the pointer.
3
Caps lock light
4
Display switch
standby.
1–25
Product Description
Table 1-12
Top Components
Item
Component
Function
5
Wireless light
(available on select
models)
turned on.
6
from standby.
from hibernation.
✎ IfandtheWindows
shutdown procedures
notebook.
7
Volume down button
8
Volume up button
9
Volume mute button
Mute light
10
Num lock light
is on.
11
only)
accessed.
12
TouchPad vertical and
horizontal scroll
regions
Scroll upward or downward and left or right.
1–26
Product Description
The external components on the bottom of the HP Pavilion
Bottom Components, HP Pavilion ze2000
Table 1-13
Bottom Components
HP Pavilion ze2000
Item
Component
Function
1
Battery bay
2
battery bay.
3
Memory module
compartment
1–27
Product Description
Table 1-13
Bottom Components
Item
Component
Function
4
Exhaust vents (4)
components.
Ä
airflow.
5
Optical drive
6
Label area
7
Ä
8
1–28
Hard drive bay
Product Description
The external components on the bottom of the Compaq Presario
Bottom Components, Compaq Presario M2000
Table 1-14
Bottom Components
Item
Component
Function
1
Battery bay
2
battery bay.
3
Memory module
compartment
1–29
Product Description
Table 1-14
Bottom Components
Item
Component
Function
4
Exhaust vents (4)
components.
Ä
airflow.
5
Optical drive
6
Label area
7
Ä
8
1–30
Hard drive bay
Product Description
1.5 Design Overview
This section presents a design overview of key parts and features
of the notebook. Refer to Chapter 3, “Illustrated Parts Catalog,”
to identify replacement parts, and Chapter 5, “Removal and
Replacement Procedures,” for disassembly steps.
The system board provides the following device connections:
Ä
■
Memory module
■
Mini PCI communications devices
■
Hard drive
■
Display
■
Keyboard and TouchPad
■
Audio
■
Intel Pentium M and Celeron M processors
■
Fan
■
PC Card
CAUTION: To properly ventilate the notebook, allow at least a 7.6-cm
(3-inch) clearance on the left and right sides of the notebook.
The notebook uses an electric fan for ventilation. The fan is
controlled by a temperature sensor and is designed to be turned
on automatically when high temperature conditions exist. These
conditions are affected by high external temperatures, system
power consumption, power management/battery conservation
configurations, battery fast charging, and software applications.
Exhaust air is displaced through the ventilation grill located on
the left side of the notebook.
1–31
2
Troubleshooting
Å
WARNING: Only authorized technicians trained by HP should repair
this equipment. All troubleshooting and repair procedures are detailed
to allow only subassembly-/module-level repair. Because of the
complexity of the individual boards and subassemblies, do not attempt
to make repairs at the component level or modifications to any printed
wiring board. Improper repairs can create a safety hazard. Any
indication of component replacement or printed wiring board
modification may void any warranty or exchange allowances.
2.1 Computer Setup
Computer Setup is a system information and customization utility
that can be used even when the operating system is not working
or will not load. This utility includes settings that are not
available in Windows.
Using Computer Setup
Information and settings in Computer Setup are accessed from
the Main, Security, Advanced, or Tools menus:
1. Turn on or restart the notebook. Press f10 while the
F10 = ROM-Based Setup message is displayed in
the lower-left corner of the screen.
❏ To change the language, use the cursor control keys
to navigate to the Advanced menu.
❏ To view navigation information, press f1.
❏ To return to the Computer Setup menu, press esc.
2–1
Troubleshooting
2. Select the Main, Security, Advanced, or Tools menu.
3. To close Computer Setup and restart the notebook:
❏ Select Exit > Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter.
– or –
❏ Select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then
press enter.
– or –
❏ Select Exit > Load Setup Defaults, and then press enter.
4. When you are prompted to confirm your action, press f10.
Selecting from the Main Menu
Table 2-1
Main Menu
Select
To Do This
System Information
■ Change the system time and system date.
■ View identification information about the
notebook.
■ View specification information about the
processor, memory and cache size, and
system ROM.
2–2
Troubleshooting
Selecting from the Security Menu
Table 2-2
Security Menu
Select
To Do This
Administrator Password
Enter, change, or delete an Administrator
password.
Power-on Password
Enter, change, or delete a power-on password.
DriveLock Passwords
Enable/disable DriveLock; change a DriveLock
user or master password.
Settings are accessible only
✎ DriveLock
when you enter Computer Setup by turning
on (not restarting) the notebook.
Password Options
(Password options can
be selected only when
a power-on password
has been set.)
Enable/disable:
■ QuickLock
■ QuickLock on standby
■ QuickBlank
enable QuickLock on standby or
✎ To
QuickBlank, you must first enable
QuickLock.
Device Security
Enable/disable:
■ Diskette drive startup*
■ CD-ROM or diskette startup
for a DVD-ROM can be entered
✎ Settings
in the CD-ROM field.
*Not applicable to SuperDisk LS-120 drives.
2–3
Troubleshooting
Selecting from the Advanced Menu
Table 2-3
Advanced Menu
Select
To Do This
Language
Change the Computer Setup language.
Boot Order
Enable/disable MultiBoot, which sets a startup
sequence that can include most bootable devices
and media in the system.
Accessibility Options
Allows electronic and information technology to
be accessible to people with varying ranges of
abilities.
Video Memory
Displays the amount of video memory available
on the notebook.
Selecting from the Tools Menu
Table 2-4
Tools Menu
Select
To Do This
Hard Drive Self Test
Run a quick comprehensive self test on hard
drives in the system that support the test features.
2–4
Troubleshooting
2.2 Troubleshooting Flowcharts
Table 2-5
Troubleshooting Flowcharts Overview
Flowchart
Description
2.1
“Flowchart 2.1—Initial Troubleshooting”
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
“Flowchart 2.8—Nonfunctioning Docking Device (if applicable)”
2.9
“Flowchart 2.9—No Operating System (OS) Loading”
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
“Flowchart 2.13—No OS Loading, Diskette Drive”
2–5
Troubleshooting
Table 2-5
Troubleshooting Flowcharts Overview (Continued)
Flowchart
Description
2.14
“Flowchart 2.14—No OS Loading, Optical Drive”
2.15
2.16
2.17
“Flowchart 2.17—Nonfunctioning Device”
2.18
“Flowchart 2.18—Nonfunctioning Keyboard”
2.19
“Flowchart 2.19—Nonfunctioning Pointing Device”
2.20
“Flowchart 2.20—No Network/Modem Connection”
2–6
Troubleshooting
Flowchart 2.1—Initial Troubleshooting
Begin
troubleshooting.
N
Go to
Power, Part 1.”
Is there
power?
Y
N
Check
LED board,
speaker
connections.
Beeps,
LEDs, or error
messages?
N
Y
Go to
“Flowchart
2.17—Nonfunction
ing Device.”
All drives
working?
N
Y
Go to
Video, Part 1.”
Is there video?
(no boot)
N
Keyboard/
pointing
device
working?
Y
N
Go to
Operating System
(OS) Loading.”
Is the OS
loading?
Y
N
Is there
sound?
Go to
“Flowchart
2.15—No Audio,
Part 1.”
Y
Y
Go to
“Flowchart
2.18—Nonfunction
ing Keyboard” or
“Flowchart
2.19—Nonfunction
ing Pointing
Device.”
N
Connecting
to network
or modem?
Y
Go to
“Flowchart
2.20—No
Network/Modem
Connection.”
End
2–7
Troubleshooting
No power
(power LED
is off).
Remove from
docking device
(if applicable).
N
N
Power up
on battery
power?
Power up
on battery
power?
Reset
power.*
Go to
Power, Part 2.”
Y
Y
N
N
Power up
on AC
power?
Power up
on AC power?
Reset
power.*
Y
Go to
Power, Part 3.”
Y
Y
Power up in
docking
device?
Done
N
1. Reseat the power cables in the docking
device and at the AC outlet.
2. Ensure the AC power source is active.
3. Ensure that the power strip is working.
Y
Done
2–8
N
Power up
in docking
device?
*NOTES
1. On select models, there is a separate
reset button.
2. On select models, the notebook can be
reset using the standby switch and
either the lid switch or the main power
switch.
Go to
“Flowchart
Docking Device (if
applicable).”
Troubleshooting
Continued from
Power, Part 1.”
Visually check for
debris in battery
socket and clean
if necessary.
Y
Power on?
Done
N
Check battery by
recharging it,
moving it to
another notebook,
or replacing it.
N
Replace
power supply
(if applicable).
Power on?
Y
N
Done
Power on?
Go to
Power, Part 3.”
Y
Done
2–9
Troubleshooting
Continued from
Power, Part 2.”
Plug directly
into AC outlet.
Y
Power LED
on?
Done
N
Reseat AC adapter
in notebook and
at power source.
Y
Power on?
Done
N
External
N
Try different
outlet.
Power outlet
active?
Y
Internal or
external AC
adapter?
Replace external
AC adapter.
N
Internal
Go to
Power, Part 4.”
Replace
power cord.
Power on?
Y
Y
Done
Power on?
Done
N
2–10
Troubleshooting
Continued from
Power, Part 3.”
Open
notebook.
Y
Loose or
damaged
parts?
N
Reseat loose
components and
boards and
replace damaged
items.
Close
notebook and
retest.
N
Power on?
Y
Done
Replace the following items (if applicable). Check
notebook operation after each replacement:
1. Internal DC-DC converter*
2. Internal AC adapter
3. Processor board*
4. System board*
*NOTE: Replace these items as a set to prevent
shorting out among components.
2–11
Troubleshooting
No video.
Docking Device
*NOTE: To change from internal to
external display, use the hotkey
combination.
Go to
Video, Part 2.”
Stand-alone
or docking
device?
Stand-alone
Internal or
external
display*?
Y
Adjust
brightness.
A
Adjust
brightness.
Press lid
switch to ensure
operation.
Y
Video OK?
Done
N
Internal
External
Video OK?
Y
Done
N
Video OK?
Done
N
Replace the following one at a time. Test after each replacement.
1. Cable between notebook and notebook display (if applicable)
2. Display
3. System board
Check for bent
pins on cable.
N
Video OK?
Y
Internal and
external
video OK?
Replace
system
board.
Y
Done
2–12
N
Try
another
display.
Done
Troubleshooting
Continued from
Video, Part 1.”
Remove
notebook from
docking device,
if connected.
Adjust
display
brightness.
Check brightness
of external
monitor.
N
Y
Go to “A” in
Video, Part 1.”
Video OK?
Y
Video OK?
Done
N
Check that notebook is properly
seated in docking device,
for bent pins on cable, and for
monitor connection.
Try another
external
monitor.
Y
Video OK?
Y
Internal
and external
video OK?
Done
Done
N
N
Adjust external
monitor display.
Go to
“Flowchart
Docking Device (if
applicable).”
2–13
Troubleshooting
Flowchart 2.8—Nonfunctioning Docking Device
(if applicable)
Nonfunctioning
docking device.
Reseat power
cord in docking
device and
power outlet.
Check voltage
setting on docking
device.
Reinstall
notebook into
docking device.
Y
Reset monitor
cable connector at
docking device.
Docking
device
operating?
N
Y
Docking
device
operating?
N
Remove
notebook, reseat
all internal parts,
and replace any
damaged items in
docking device.
2–14
Done
Done
components one at a time. Check notebook
operation after each replacement.
1. Power supply
2. I/O board
3. Backplane board
4. Switch box
5. Docking device motor mechanism
Troubleshooting
Flowchart 2.9—No Operating System (OS)
Loading
No OS
loading.*
Reseat power
cord in docking
device and
power outlet.
No OS loading from hard drive,
No OS loading from diskette drive,
go to “Flowchart 2.13—No OS Loading, Diskette
Drive.”
No OS loading from CD- or DVD-ROM drive,
Optical Drive.”
No OS loading from network,
go to “Flowchart 2.20—No Network/Modem
Connection.”
*NOTE: Before beginning troubleshooting, always
check cable connections, cable ends, and drives
for bent or damaged pins.
2–15
Troubleshooting
Part 1
OS not
loading from
hard drive.
Y
Nonsystem
disk message?
Go to
OS Loading,
N
Reseat
external
hard drive.
Y
OS loading?
Done
N
N
Boot
from
CD?
N
Y
Boot
from
diskette?
Check the Setup
utility for correct
booting order.
Y
Change boot
priority through
the Setup utility
and reboot.
N
Boot
from
hard drive?
N
Y
Boot
from
hard drive?
Done
Y
2–16
Go to
“Flowchart
2.13—No OS
Loading, Diskette
Drive.”
Go to
“Flowchart
Device.”
Troubleshooting
Part 2
Continued from
OS Loading,
Reseat
hard drive.
N
1. Replace
hard drive.
2. Replace
system board.
CD or
diskette in
drive?
Y
Y
Hard drive
accessible?
Done
N
Remove
diskette and
reboot.
Run FDISK.
Y
Boot
from
hard drive?
N
Done
N
Hard drive
partitioned?
Y
N
Boot
from diskette
drive?
Y
Go to
“Flowchart
2.13—No OS
Loading, Diskette
Drive.”
Create partition,
and then format
hard drive to
bootable
C:\ prompt.
N
Hard drive
formatted?
Format hard drive
and bring to
a bootable
C:\ prompt.
Notebook
booted?
Load OS using
Operating System disc
(if applicable).
Y
N
Y
Hard drive
accessible?
Y
Done
N
Go to
OS Loading,
Go to
OS Loading,
2–17
Troubleshooting
Part 3
Continued from
OS Loading,
N
System
files on hard
drive?
Install OS
and reboot.
Y
Y
Y
Virus
on
hard drive?
OS
loading from
hard drive?
Clean virus.
N
Done
N
Y
Run SCANDISK and
check for
bad sectors.
Diagnostics
on diskette?
Replace
hard drive.
N
N
Can bad
sectors
be fixed?
Run diagnostics
and follow
recommendations.
Replace
hard drive.
Y
N
Boot from
hard drive?
Fix bad
sectors.
Replace
hard drive.
Y
Done
2–18
Troubleshooting
Flowchart 2.13—No OS Loading, Diskette Drive
Y
OS not loading
from
diskette drive.
Reseat
diskette drive.
OS
loading?
Done
N
Y
N
Bootable
diskette
in drive?
Nonsystem
disk message?
N
Y
N
Check diskette
for system files.
Try different
diskette.
Go to
“Flowchart
2.17—Nonfunction
ing Device.”
Boot
from another
device?
Y
Y
N
Diskette
drive enabled
in the Setup
utility?
Enable drive
and cold boot
notebook.
1. Replace
diskette drive.
2. Replace system
board.
Nonsystem
disk error?
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Install bootable
diskette and
reboot notebook.
Is diskette
drive boot
order
correct?
Reset the notebook.
Refer to
Section 1.2,
“Resetting the
Notebook,” for
instructions.
Change boot
priority using
the Setup utility.
Go to
“Flowchart
Device.”
OS
loading?
Done
N
2–19
Troubleshooting
Flowchart 2.14—No OS Loading, Optical Drive
Y
No OS
loading from
CD-ROM or
DVD-ROM drive.
N
Bootable
disc in
drive?
Disc
in drive?
Y
N
Install
bootable disc.
Install bootable
disc and
reboot
notebook.
Try another
bootable disc.
Y
Boots from
CD or DVD?
Done
N
Y
Boots from
CD or DVD?
Reseat
drive.
Done
N
N
Booting
from another
device?
Y
Y
Booting
order
correct?
N
Go to
“Flowchart
Device.”
Reset the notebook.
Refer to
Section 1.2,
“Resetting the
Notebook,” for
instructions.
Go to
“Flowchart
Device.”
Correct boot
order using
the Setup utility.
2–20
Troubleshooting
Y
Turn up audio
internally or
externally.
No audio.
Audio?
Done
N
N
Y
Notebook in
docking device
(if applicable)?
Go to
“Flowchart
2.16—No Audio,
Part 2.”
Internal
audio?
Undock
N
Y
Go to
“Flowchart
2.16—No Audio,
Part 2.”
components one at a time, as applicable.
Check audio status after each change.
1. Reseat docking device audio cable.
2. Replace audio cable.
3. Replace speaker.
4. Replace docking device audio board.
5. Replace backplane board.
6. Replace I/O board.
Y
Go to
“Flowchart
Device.”
Audio?
Done
N
2–21
Troubleshooting
Continued from
“Flowchart
2.15—No Audio,
Part 1.”
N
Audio
driver in OS
configured?
Reload
audio drivers.
Y
N
Correct
drivers for
application?
Load drivers and
set configuration
in OS.
Y
Connect to
external
speaker.
N
Audio?
Y
Replace audio
board and
speaker
connections
in notebook
(if applicable).
Y
Audio?
Done
N
1. Replace internal speakers.
2. Replace audio board (if applicable).
3. Replace system board.
2–22
Troubleshooting
Flowchart 2.17—Nonfunctioning Device
Nonfunctioning
device.
Reseat
device.
Unplug the nonfunctioning device from the notebook
and inspect cables and plugs for bent or broken pins
or other damage.
Y
Clear
CMOS.
Any physical
device detected?
Fix or
replace
broken item.
Replace hard drive.
Go to
Operating System
(OS) Loading.”
N
Reattach device.
Close notebook,
plug in power,
and reboot.
N
Device
boots
properly?
N
Replace NIC.
If integrated NIC,
replace system
board.
Y
Device
boots
properly?
Y
Done
Replace diskette
drive.
Done
2–23
Troubleshooting
Flowchart 2.18—Nonfunctioning Keyboard
Keyboard
not operating
properly.
Connect notebook
to good external
keyboard.
N
External
device
works?
Replace
system
board.
Y
Reseat internal
keyboard
connector
(if applicable).
N
Replace internal
keyboard or
cable.
OK?
Y
Y
Done
OK?
Done
N
Replace
system
board.
2–24
Troubleshooting
Flowchart 2.19—Nonfunctioning Pointing
Device
Pointing device
not operating
properly.
Connect notebook
to good external
pointing device.
N
Replace
system
board.
External
device
works?
Y
Reseat internal
pointing device
connector
(if applicable).
N
Replace internal
pointing device
or cable.
OK?
Y
Y
Done
OK?
Done
N
Replace
system
board.
2–25
Troubleshooting
Flowchart 2.20—No Network/Modem
Connection
No network
or modem
connection.
N
Network
or modem jack
active?
Replace jack
or have jack
activated.
Y
Y
Connect
to nondigital
line.
Digital
line?
N
Y
N
NIC/modem
configured
in OS?
Reload
drivers and
reconfigure.
Done
OK?
N
Y
Disconnect all
power from
the notebook
and open.
Replace NIC/modem
(if applicable).
Y
Reseat NIC/modem
(if applicable).
OK?
Done
N
Replace
system
board.
2–26
3
This chapter provides an illustrated parts breakdown and a
reference for spare part numbers and option part numbers.
3.1 Serial Number Location
When ordering parts or requesting information, provide the
notebook serial number and model number located on the bottom
of the notebook.
3–1
3.2 Notebook Major Components
3–2
Table 3-1
Spare Parts: Notebook Major Components
Item
Description
1
Display assemblies (include wireless antenna boards
and cables)
Spare Part
Number
15.0-inch, XGA TFT, for use on HP Pavilion ze2000
models
381065-001
15.0-inch, XGA TFT, for use on Compaq Presario
M2000 models
381066-001
382417-001
383190-001
Hinge cover (not illustrated; for use only on
Compaq Presario M2000 models)
2
3
382418-001
Keyboard covers (include wireless button and light)
with wireless capability
For use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models without
wireless capability
382406-001
For use on Compaq Presario M2000 models with
wireless capability
without wireless capability
382407-001
382408-001
382409-001
LED boards (include cable, not illustrated)
382415-001
382907-001
3–3
3–4
Table 3-1
Item
Description
4
Keyboards
Spare Part
Number
Belgium
Brazil
Denmark
France
French Canada
Germany
Greece
Israel
Italy
Korea
Latin America
Europe and the
Netherlands
Norway
Portugal
367778-A41
367778-201
367778-081
367778-051
367778-121
367778-041
367778-DJ1
367778-BB1
367778-061
367778-AD1
367778-161
367778-331
367778-091
367778-131
Saudi Arabia
Spain
Sweden/Finland
Switzerland
Taiwan
Thailand
United Kingdom
Asia Pacific,
Australia,
Canada,
Hong Kong,
People’s
Republic
of China, and
the United
States
367778-171
367778-071
367778-B71
367778-111
367778-AB1
367778-281
367778-031
367778-001
Denmark
France
French Canada
International
Italy
Korea
Latin America
367777-081
367777-051
367777-121
367777-021
367777-061
367777-AD1
367777-161
Norway
Spain
Sweden/Finland
Taiwan
Thailand
United Kingdom
United States
367777-091
367777-071
367777-B71
367777-AB1
367777-281
367777-031
367777-001
3–5
3–6
Table 3-1
Item
Description
5
Top covers (include TouchPad)
6
Spare Part
Number
defeatured models
382396-001
defeatured models
382397-001
382905-001
382906-001
Speaker assemblies
382410-001
383189-001
7
Broadcomm Bluetooth Wireless LAN board
376651-001
8
382416-001
9
382414-001
10
382411-001
11
382412-001
12
Processors (include thermal pad)
13
373053-001
373052-001
367771-001
380690-001
380033-001
380032-001
382413-001
3–7
3–8
Table 3-1
Item
Description
14
System boards (include disk cell RTC battery)
15
16
Spare Part
Number
For use on models with full-featured models
381062-001
For use on models with defeatured models
381061-001
Base enclosures
382398-001
382399-001
Hard drives (all 4200-rpm, include frame and connector)
80 GB
60 GB
40 GB
381398-001
381397-001
381396-001
17a
17b
17c
382400-001
382401-001
Includes:
Hard drive cover (includes two captive screws)
Memory module compartment cover (includes 2 captive screws)
Mini PCI compartment cover (includes 2 captive screws)
Not illustrated:
Notebook feet (4)
3–9
3–10
Table 3-1
Item
Description
18
Mini PCI communications cards
802.11b Intel (MOW)
802.11b Intel (ROW)
19
21
373047-001
373048-001
373023-001
373024-001
373026-001
373025-001
Memory modules (266 MHz)
512-MB
256-MB
20
Spare Part
Number
381395-001
381394-001
Optical drives (include bezel)
8X DVD-ROM drive
381399-001
381401-001
381403-001
8X DVD-ROM drive
24X CD-ROM drive
381400-001
381402-001
381404-001
382395-001
Battery packs
12-cell, 8.8-AHr
6-cell, 4.4-AHr
367760-001
367759-001
3–11
3.3 Miscellaneous Plastics Kit
3–12
Table 3-2
Item
Description
Spare Part
Number
1
2
3
4
5
367765-001
367766-001
Includes:
Memory module compartment cover
Hard drive cover
Notebook feet (4)
3–13
3.4 Mass Storage Devices
3–14
Table 3-3
Spare Part
Number
Item
Description
1
Hard drives (all 4200-rpm; include frame and connector)
80-GB
60-GB
40-GB
2
381398-001
381397-001
381396-001
Optical drives
8X DVD-ROM Drive
381399-001
381401-001
381403-001
8X DVD-ROM Drive
24X CD-ROM Drive
381400-001
381402-001
381404-001
382395-001
USB digital drive (not illustrated)
364727-001
3–15
3.5 Miscellaneous
Table 3-4
Spare Parts: Miscellaneous (not illustrated)
Description
Spare Part
Number
Logo Kits
382404-001
382405-001
Remote control (for use only on HP ze2000
notebook models)
371694-001
USB travel mouse
309674-001
375759-001
65-watt AC adapter
371790-001
Screw Kit (includes the following screws; refer to Appendix C, “Screw Listing,”
for more information on screw specifications and usage)
■
■
■
■
382402-001
382403-001
Phillips PM2.0×7.0 round head screw ■ Phillips PM2.0×3.0 screw
3–16
Table 3-4
Spare Parts: Miscellaneous (not illustrated) (Continued)
Description
Spare Part
Number
Power cords
For use in:
Australia and New Zealand
373979-011
Belgium, Europe, Finland, France, Germany, Greece,
the Netherlands, Norway, Portugal, Spain, and Sweden
373979-021
Brazil
373979-201
Canada, French Canada, Latin America, Taiwan,
Thailand, and the United States
373979-001
Denmark
373979-081
Hong Kong and the United Kingdom
373979-031
Israel
373979-BB1
Italy
373979-061
Japan
373979-291
Korea
373979-AD1
People’s Republic of China
373979-AA1
Switzerland
373979-111
3–17
3.6 Sequential Part Number Listing
Table 3-5
Spare Parts: Sequential Part Number Listing
Spare Part
Number
Description
309674-001
USB travel mouse
367759-001
367760-001
367771-001
367777-001
United States
367777-021
Keyboard for use on Compaq Presario M2000 international
models
367777-031
United Kingdom
367777-051
Keyboard for use on Compaq Presario M2000 models in France
367777-061
Keyboard for use on Compaq Presario M2000 models in Italy
367777-071
Keyboard for use on Compaq Presario M2000 models in Spain
367777-081
Denmark
367777-091
Norway
367777-121
Keyboard for use on Compaq Presario M2000 models in French
Canada
367777-161
Latin America
3–18
Table 3-5
Spare Part
Number
Description
367777-281
Thailand
367777-AB1
Keyboard for use on Compaq Presario M2000 models in Taiwan
367777-AD1
Keyboard for use on Compaq Presario M2000 models in Korea
367777-B71
Sweden/Finland
367778-001
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in Asia Pacific,
Australia, Canada, Hong Kong, the People’s Republic of China,
and the United States
367778-031
the United Kingdom
367778-051
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in France
367778-061
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in Italy
367778-071
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in Spain
367778-081
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in Denmark
367778-091
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in Norway
367778-111
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in Switzerland
367778-121
French Canada
367778-131
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in Portugal
367778-151
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in Greece
367778-161
Latin America
367778-171
Saudi Arabia
3–19
Table 3-5
Spare Part
Number
Description
367778-201
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in Brazil
367778-281
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in Thailand
367778-331
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in Europe and
the Netherlands
367778-A41
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in Belgium
367778-AB1
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in Taiwan
367778-AD1
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in Korea
367778-B71
Sweden/Finland
367778-BB1
Keyboard for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models in Israel
371694-001
Remote control (for use only on HP ze2000 models)
371790-001
65-watt AC adapter
373023-001
Mini PCI communications card, 802.11b Intel (MOW)
373024-001
Mini PCI communications card, 802.11b Intel (ROW)
373025-001
Mini PCI communications card, 802.11b/g Intel (ROW)
373026-001
Mini PCI communications card, 802.11b/g Intel (MOW)
373047-001
Mini PCI communications card, 802.11b/g Broadcomm (MOW)
373048-001
Mini PCI communications card, 802.11b/g Broadcomm (ROW)
373052-001
373053-001
373979-001
Power cord for use in Canada, French Canada, Latin America,
Taiwan, Thailand, and the United States
3–20
Table 3-5
Spare Part
Number
Description
373979-011
Power cord for use in Australia and New Zealand
373979-021
Power cord for use in Belgium, Europe, Finland, France,
Germany, Greece, the Netherlands, Norway, Portugal, Spain,
and Sweden
373979-031
Power cord for use in Hong Kong and the United Kingdom
373979-061
Power cord for use in Italy
373979-081
Power cord for use in Denmark
373979-111
Power cord for use in Switzerland
373979-201
Power cord for use in Brazil
373979-AA1
Power cord for use in People’s Republic of China
373979-AD1
Power cord for use in Korea
373979-BB1
Power cord for use in Israel
375759-001
376651-001
Broadcomm Bluetooth Wireless LAN
380032-001
380033-001
380690-001
Processor, Intel Pentium M 715A (1.5-GHz) with 400-MHz FSB
381061-001
System board for use on models with defeatured models
381062-001
System board for use on models with full-featured models
3–21
Table 3-5
Spare Part
Number
Description
381065-001
HP Pavilion ze2000 models (includes wireless antenna boards
and cables)
381066-001
Compaq Presario M2000 models (includes wireless antenna
boards and cables)
381394-001
381395-001
381396-001
381397-001
381398-001
381399-001
8X DVD-ROM Drive for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models
(includes bezel)
381400-001
8X DVD-ROM Drive for use on Compaq Presario M2000
381401-001
24X DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive for use on HP Pavilion ze2000
381402-001
24X DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive for use on
381403-001
HP Pavilion ze2000 models (includes bezel)
381404-001
382395-001
24X CD-ROM Drive for use on Compaq Presario M2000
382396-001
full-featured models (includes TouchPad)
3–22
Table 3-5
Spare Part
Number
Description
382397-001
Top cover for use on Compaq M2000 models with full-featured
382398-001
Base enclosure for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models
382399-001
Base enclosure for use on Compaq Presario M2000 models
382400-001
Miscellaneous Plastics Kit for use on HP Pavilion ze2000
models
382401-001
Miscellaneous Plastics Kit for use on Compaq Presario M2000
models
382402-001
Screw Kit for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models
382403-001
Screw Kit For use on Compaq Presario M2000 models
382404-001
Logo Kit for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models
382405-001
Logo Kit for use on Compaq Presario M2000 models
382406-001
Keyboard cover for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models
382407-001
382408-001
Keyboard cover for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models without
wireless capability (includes wireless button and light)
382409-001
without wireless capability (includes wireless button and light)
382410-001
Speaker assembly for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models
382411-001
382412-001
382413-001
382414-001
3–23
Table 3-5
Spare Part
Number
Description
382415-001
LED board for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models
(includes cable)
382416-001
382417-001
Display hinge brackets for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models
382418-001
Hinge covers (for use only on Compaq Presario M2000 models)
382905-001
defeatured models (includes TouchPad)
382906-001
Top cover for use on Compaq M2000 models with defeatured
382907-001
LED board for use on Compaq Presario M2000 models
(includes cable)
383189-001
Speaker assembly for use on Compaq Presario M2000 models
383190-001
Display hinge brackets for use on Compaq Presario M2000
models
3–24
4
Preliminaries
This chapter provides essential information for proper and
safe removal and replacement service.
4.1 Tools Required
You will need the following tools to complete the removal and
replacement procedures:
■ Magnetic driver
■ Phillips P0 driver
■ 5.0-mm socket for system board locks
■ Flat-bladed driver
■ Tool kit—includes connector removal tool, loopback plugs,
and case utility tool
4–1
4.2 Service Considerations
The following sections include some of the considerations
that you should keep in mind during disassembly and assembly
procedures.
you remove each subassembly from the notebook, place
✎ As
the subassembly (and all accompanying s) away from the work
area to prevent damage.
Plastic Parts
Using excessive force during disassembly and reassembly can
damage plastic parts. Use care when handling the plastic parts.
Apply pressure only at the points designated in the maintenance
instructions.
Cables and Connectors
Ä
CAUTION: When servicing the notebook, ensure that cables are
placed in their proper locations during the reassembly process.
Improper cable placement can damage the notebook.
Cables must be handled with extreme care to avoid damage.
Apply only the tension required to unseat or seat the cables
during removal and insertion. Handle cables by the connector
whenever possible. In all cases, avoid bending, twisting, or
tearing cables. Ensure that cables are routed in such a way that
they cannot be caught or snagged by parts being removed or
replaced. Handle flex cables with extreme care; these cables
tear easily.
4–2
4.3 Preventing Damage to
Removable Drives
Removable drives are fragile components that must be handled
with care. To prevent damage to the notebook, damage to a
removable drive, or loss of information, observe the following
precautions:
■ Before removing or inserting a hard drive, shut down the
notebook. If you are unsure whether the notebook is off or
in hibernation, turn the notebook on, and then shut it down
■ Before removing a diskette drive or optical drive, ensure that
a diskette or disc is not in the drive and ensure that the optical
drive tray is closed.
■ Before handling a drive, ensure that you are discharged of
static electricity. While handling a drive, avoid touching the
connector.
■ Handle drives on surfaces covered with at least one inch of
shock-proof foam.
■ Avoid dropping drives from any height onto any surface.
■ After removing a hard drive, an optical drive, or a diskette
drive, place it in a static-proof bag.
■ Avoid exposing a hard drive to products that have magnetic
fields, such as monitors or speakers.
■ Avoid exposing a drive to temperature extremes or liquids.
■ If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble pack
mailer or other suitable form of protective packaging and
label the package “Fragile: Handle With Care.”
4–3
4.4 Preventing Electrostatic Damage
Many electronic components are sensitive to electrostatic
discharge (ESD). Circuitry design and structure determine the
degree of sensitivity. Networks built into many integrated circuits
provide some protection, but in many cases, the discharge
contains enough power to alter device parameters or melt
silicon junctions.
A sudden discharge of static electricity from a finger or other
conductor can destroy static-sensitive devices or microcircuitry.
Often the spark is neither felt nor heard, but damage occurs.
An electronic device exposed to electrostatic discharge might not
be affected at all and can work perfectly throughout a normal
cycle. Or the device might function normally for a while, then
degrade in the internal layers, reducing its life expectancy.
4–4
4.5 Packaging and Transporting
Precautions
Use the following grounding precautions when packaging and
transporting equipment:
■ To avoid hand contact, transport products in static-safe
containers, such as tubes, bags, or boxes.
■ Protect all electrostatic-sensitive parts and assemblies with
conductive or approved containers or packaging.
■ Keep electrostatic-sensitive parts in their containers until
the parts arrive at static-free workstations.
■ Place items on a grounded surface before removing items
from their containers.
■ Always be properly grounded when touching a sensitive
component or assembly.
■ Store reusable electrostatic-sensitive parts from assemblies
in protective packaging or nonconductive foam.
■ Use transporters and conveyors made of antistatic belts and
roller bushings. Ensure that mechanized equipment used for
moving materials is wired to ground and that proper materials
are selected to avoid static charging. When grounding is not
possible, use an ionizer to dissipate electric charges.
4–5
4.6 Workstation Precautions
Use the following grounding precautions at workstations:
■ Cover the workstation with approved static-shielding material
(refer to Table 4-2, “Static-Shielding Materials”).
■ Use a wrist strap connected to a properly grounded work
surface and use properly grounded tools and equipment.
■ Use conductive field service tools, such as cutters, drivers,
and vacuums.
■ When using fixtures must directly contact dissipative surfaces,
use fixtures made only of static-safe materials.
■ Keep the work area free of nonconductive materials, such
as ordinary plastic assembly aids and Styrofoam.
■ Handle electrostatic-sensitive components, parts, and
assemblies by the case or PCM laminate. Handle these
items only at static-free workstations.
■ Avoid contact with pins, leads, or circuitry.
■ Turn off power and input signals before inserting or
removing connectors or test equipment.
4.7 Grounding Equipment and
Methods
Grounding equipment must include either a wrist strap or a
foot strap at a grounded workstation.
■ When seated, wear a wrist strap connected to a grounded
system. Wrist straps are flexible straps with a minimum of
one megohm ±10% resistance in the ground cords. To provide
proper ground, wear a strap snugly against the skin at all times.
On grounded mats with banana-plug connectors, use alligator
clips to connect a wrist strap.
■ When standing, use foot straps and a grounded floor mat.
Foot straps (heel, toe, or boot straps) can be used at standing
workstations and are compatible with most types of shoes
or boots. On conductive floors or dissipative floor mats, use
foot straps on both feet with a minimum of one megohm
resistance between the operator and ground. To be effective,
the conductive strips must be worn in contact with the skin.
4–6
Other grounding equipment recommended for use in preventing
electrostatic damage includes:
■ Antistatic tape
■ Antistatic smocks, aprons, and sleeve protectors
■ Conductive bins and other assembly or soldering aids
■ Nonconductive foam
■ Conductive tabletop workstations with ground cords of
one megohm resistance
■ Static-dissipative tables or floor mats with hard ties to
the ground
■ Field service kits
■ Static awareness labels
■ Material-handling packages
■ Nonconductive plastic bags, tubes, or boxes
■ Metal tote boxes
■ Electrostatic voltage levels and protective materials
4–7
Table 4-1 shows how humidity affects the electrostatic voltage
levels generated by different activities.
Table 4-1
Typical Electrostatic Voltage Levels
Relative Humidity
Event
10%
40%
55%
Walking across carpet
35,000 V
15,000 V
7,500 V
Walking across vinyl floor
12,000 V
5,000 V
3,000 V
Motions of bench worker
6,000 V
800 V
400 V
Removing DIPS from plastic tube
2,000 V
700 V
400 V
Removing DIPS from vinyl tray
11,500 V
4,000 V
2,000 V
Removing DIPS from Styrofoam
14,500 V
5,000 V
3,500 V
Removing bubble pack from PCB
26,500 V
20,000 V
7,000 V
Packing PCBs in foam-lined box
21,000 V
11,000 V
5,000 V
✎ A product can be degraded by as little as 700 V.
Table 4-2 lists the shielding protection provided by antistatic
bags and floor mats.
Table 4-2
Static-Shielding Materials
Material
Use
Voltage Protection Level
Antistatic plastic
Bags
1,500 V
Carbon-loaded plastic
Floor mats
7,500 V
Metallized laminate
Floor mats
5,000 V
4–8
5
Procedures
This chapter provides removal and replacement procedures.
There are 61 screws, in 10 different sizes, that must be removed,
replaced, or loosened when servicing the notebook. Make special
note of each screw size and location during removal and
replacement.
Refer to Appendix C, “Screw Listing,” for detailed information
on screw sizes, locations, and usage.
5–1
5.1 Serial Number
Report the notebook serial number to HP when requesting
information or ordering spare parts. The serial number is
located on the bottom of the notebook.
5–2
5.2 Disassembly Sequence Chart
Use the chart below to determine the section number to be
referenced when removing notebook components.
Disassembly Sequence Chart
Section
Description
5.3
Preparing the notebook for
disassembly
Battery pack
Hard drive
# of Screws Removed
0
2 loosened to remove hard
drive cover
4 to disassemble hard drive
5.4
Notebook feet
0
5.5
Optical drive
1
5.6
Memory module
2 loosened
5.7
Mini PCI communications card
1 loosened
Ä
To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a
warning message, install only a Mini PCI device authorized
for use in your notebook by the governmental agency that
regulates wireless devices in your country. If you install a
device and then receive a warning message, remove the
device to restore notebook functionality. Then contact
Customer Care.
5.8
Keyboard cover
2
5.9
LED cover
2
5.10
Keyboard
4
5–3
Disassembly Sequence Chart (Continued)
Section
Description
# of Screws Removed
5.11
Display assembly
5.12
Base enclosure
5.13
Speaker assembly
0
5.14
Heat sink
3
5.15
Fan
2
5.16
Processor
0
5.17
2
5.18
2
5.19
2
5.20
Bluetooth board
2
5.21
System board
5–4
5.3 Preparing the Notebook for
Disassembly
Before you begin any removal or installation procedures:
1. Shut down the notebook. If you are unsure whether the
notebook is off or in hibernation, turn the computer on,
and then shut it down through the operating system.
3. Disconnect the power cord.
5–5
Battery Pack Spare Part Number Information
12-cell, 8.8-AHr
6-cell, 4.4-AHr
367760-001
367759-001
4. Remove the battery pack by following these steps:
a. Turn the notebook upside down with the front panel
toward you.
b. Slide and hold the battery release latch 1 to the left.
(The front edge of the battery pack disengages from
the notebook.)
c. Lift the front edge of the battery pack up and swing
it back 2.
d. Remove the battery pack.
Removing the Battery Pack
Reverse the above procedure to install the battery pack.
5–6
Hard Drive Spare Part Number Information
381398-001
381397-001
381396-001
5. Remove the hard drive by following these steps:
a. Position the notebook with the rear panel toward you.
b. Loosen the 2 black PM2.0×5.0 screws 1 that secure the
hard drive cover to the notebook.
c. Lift the right side of the cover and swing it to the left 2.
d. Remove the hard drive cover.
hard drive cover is included in the Miscellaneous
✎ The
Plastics Kits, spare part numbers 382400-001 (for use on
HP Pavilion ze2000 models) and 382401-001 (for use on
Compaq Presario M2000 models).
Removing the Hard Drive Cover
5–7
e. Use the mylar tab 1 on the right side of the hard drive to
lift the right side of the hard drive until it disconnects from
the notebook.
f. Lift the hard drive straight up 2 and remove it from the
hard drive bay.
Removing the Hard Drive
5–8
g. Remove the 4 silver PM2.5×4.0 screws 1 that secure
the hard drive frame to the hard drive.
h. Lift the frame up 2 to remove if from the hard drive.
i. Slide the hard drive connector 3 toward you and
remove it.
Removing the Hard Drive Frame and Connector
Reverse the above procedure to reassemble and install the
hard drive.
5–9
5.4 Notebook Feet
The notebook feet are adhesive-backed rubber pads. The feet are
included in the Miscellaneous Plastics Kits, spare part numbers
382400-001 (for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models) and
382401-001 (for use on Compaq Presario M2000 models). The
feet attach to the base enclosure as illustrated below.
Replacing the Notebook Feet
5–10
5.5 Optical Drive
Optical Drive Spare Part Number Information
8X DVD-ROM Drive
381399-001
381401-001
381403-001
8X DVD-ROM Drive
24X CD-ROM Drive
381400-001
381402-001
381404-001
382395-001
2. Remove the hard drive cover (Section 5.3).
5–11
3. Remove the black PM2.0×6.0 screw 1 that secures the
optical drive to the notebook.
Compaq Presario M2000 optical drive is secured by
✎ The
one black PM2.0×7.0 screw.
4. Insert a thin tool, such as a paper clip, into the media tray
release hole 2. (The optical drive media tray releases from
the optical drive.)
5. Use the media tray frame to slide the optical drive to
the right 3.
6. Remove the optical drive.
Removing the Optical Drive
Reverse the above procedure to install an optical drive.
5–12
5.6 Memory Module
Memory Module Spare Part Number Information
512-MB
256-MB
381395-001
381394-001
1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3).
5–13
2. Loosen the 2 black PM2.0×5.0 screws 1 that secure the
memory module compartment cover to the notebook.
3. Lift the rear edge of the memory module compartment cover
up and swing it toward you 2.
4. Remove the memory module compartment cover.
memory module compartment cover is included in the
✎ The
Removing the Memory Module Compartment Cover
5–14
5. Spread the retaining tabs 1 on each side of the memory
module socket to release the memory module. (The right side
of the module rises away from the notebook.)
6. Slide the module away from the socket at an angle 2.
that memory modules are slotted 3 to prevent incorrect
✎ Note
installation into the memory module socket.
Removing the Memory Module
Reverse the above procedure to install a memory module.
5–15
5.7 Mini PCI Communications Card
Mini PCI Communications Card
802.11b Intel (MOW)
802.11b Intel (ROW)
373047-001
373048-001
373023-001
373024-001
373026-001
373025-001
5–16
2. Loosen the black PM2.0×5.0 screw 1 that secures the
Mini PCI compartment cover to the notebook.
3. Lift the rear edge of the Mini PCI compartment cover up and
then swing it toward you 2.
4. Remove the Mini PCI compartment cover.
Mini PCI compartment cover is included in the
✎ The
Removing the Mini PCI Compartment Cover
5–17
disconnecting the cables, make note of which wireless
✎ Before
antenna cable is attached to which antenna clip on the Mini
PCI communications card.
5. Disconnect the wireless antenna cables 1 from the Mini PCI
6. Spread the two retaining tabs 2 that secure the Mini PCI
communications card to the communications compartment
socket. (The front edge of the board rises up).
7. Remove the wireless communications card by pulling the
board away from the socket at a 45-degree angle 3.
PCI communications cards are slotted 4 to prevent
✎ Mini
incorrect installation into the Mini PCI socket.
Removing a Mini PCI Communications Card
Reverse the above procedure to install a Mini PCI
5–18
5.8 Keyboard Cover
Keyboard Cover Spare Part Number Information
For use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models with wireless capability
(includes wireless button and light)
For use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models without wireless
382406-001
For use on Compaq Presario M2000 models with wireless
For use on Compaq Presario M2000 models without wireless
382407-001
382408-001
382409-001
2. Turn the notebook upside down with the rear panel
toward you.
5–19
3. Remove the 2 silver PM2.0×5.0 screws that secure the
keyboard cover to the notebook.
Removing the Keyboard Cover Screws
5–20
4. Turn the notebook display-side up with the front panel
toward you.
5. Open the notebook as far as possible.
6. Insert a flat blade tool into the keyboard cover notches behind
the f1, f5, f11, and insert keys 1 and lift up 2 until the
keyboard cover disengages from the notebook.
7. Remove the keyboard cover.
Removing the Keyboard Cover
Reverse the above procedure to install the keyboard cover.
5–21
5.9 LED Board
LED Board Spare Part Number Information
382415-001
382907-001
5–22
3. Release the zero insertion force (ZIF) connector to which the
keyboard cable is connected and disconnect the keyboard
LED board to the notebook.
5. Remove the LED board 3.
Removing the LED Board
Reverse the above procedure to install the LED board.
5–23
5.10 Keyboard
Keyboard Spare Part Number Information
Belgium
Brazil
Denmark
France
French Canada
Germany
Greece
Israel
Italy
Korea
Latin America
Europe and the
Netherlands
Norway
367778-A41
367778-201
367778-081
367778-051
367778-121
367778-041
367778-DJ1
367778-BB1
367778-061
367778-AD1
367778-161
367778-331
367778-091
Portugal
Saudi Arabia
Spain
Sweden/Finland
Switzerland
Taiwan
Thailand
United Kingdom
Asia Pacific, Australia,
Canada,
Hong Kong, People’s
Republic
of China, and the
United States
367778-131
367778-171
367778-071
367778-B71
367778-111
367778-AB1
367778-281
367778-031
367778-001
Denmark
France
French Canada
International
Italy
Korea
Latin America
367777-081
367777-051
367777-121
367777-021
367777-061
367777-AD1
367777-161
Norway
Spain
Sweden/Finland
Taiwan
Thailand
United Kingdom
United States
367777-091
367777-071
367777-B71
367777-AB1
367777-281
367777-031
367777-001
5–24
3. Remove the 3 black PM2.0×4.0 screws 1 and the
black PM2.0×6.0 screw 2 that secure the keyboard to
the notebook.
Removing the Keyboard Screws
5–25
4. Lift the rear edge of the keyboard and swing it toward you
until it rests on the palm rest.
Releasing the Keyboard
5–26
5. Release the zero insertion force (ZIF) connector 1 to which
the keyboard cable is connected and disconnect the keyboard
6. Remove the keyboard.
Disconnecting the Keyboard Cable
Reverse the above procedure to install the keyboard.
5–27
5.11 Display Assembly
Display Assembly Spare Part Number Information
15.0-inch, XGA TFT, for use on HP Pavilion ze2000 models
(includes wireless antenna boards and cables)
381065-001
15.0-inch, XGA TFT, for use on Compaq Presario M2000
models (includes wireless antenna boards and cables)
381066-001
382417-001
383190-001
Hinge cover (not illustrated; for use only on Compaq Presario
M2000 models)
382418-001
a. Memory module compartment cover (Section 5.6)
b. Mini PCI compartment cover (Section 5.7)
c. Keyboard cover (Section 5.8)
d. Keyboard (Section 5.10)
5–28
toward you.
3. Disconnect the wireless antenna cables from the Mini PCI
communications card 1.
4. Remove the cables from the clip 2 in the base enclosure.
Disconnecting and Removing the Wireless Antenna Cables
5–29
5. Turn the notebook display-side up with the front toward you.
6. Open the display.
7. Disconnect the display cable from the system board 1.
8. Remove the wireless antenna cables from the clips 2 in the
top cover.
Disconnecting the Display Cables
5–30
Ä
display assembly.
9 and 10 apply only to HP Pavilion ze2000 models. See
✎ Steps
steps 11 and 12 in this section for information on removing the
display assembly on Compaq Presario M2000 models.
Removing the Display Assembly Screws,
5–31
Ä
display assembly.
11 and 12 apply only to Compaq Presario M2000
✎ Steps
models.
Removing the Display Assembly,
Reverse the above procedure to install the display assembly.
5–32
5.12 Base Enclosure
Base Enclosure Spare Part Number Information
382398-001
382399-001
2. Position the notebook with the front panel toward you.
5–33
3 through 5 apply only to HP Pavilion ze2000 models.
✎ Steps
See steps 6 through 8 in this section for information on
removing the base enclosure screws on Compaq Presario
M2000 models.
notebook.
5–34
toward you.
5. Remove the following:
1 Five PM2.0×16.0 screws that secure the base enclosure
the notebook
2 Seven black PM2.0×6.0 screws that secure the base
enclosure the notebook
3 Six silver PM2.0×5.0 screws that secure the base enclosure
the notebook
5–35
6 through 8 apply only to Compaq Presario M2000
✎ Steps
models.
6. Remove the 2 black PM2.0×7.0 screws 1 and the silver
PM2.0×5.0 screw 2 that secure the base enclosure to
the notebook.
5–36
toward you.
notebook.
5–37
9 and 10 apply to both HP Pavilion ze2000 and
✎ Steps
Compaq Presario M2000 models.
9. Lift the rear edge of the base enclosure 1 until it disengages
from the notebook.
10. Slide the base enclosure back 2 and remove it.
Removing the Base Enclosure
Reverse the above procedure to install the base enclosure.
5–38
5.13 Speaker Assembly
Speaker Assembly Spare Part Number Information
382410-001
383189-001
5–39
2. Disconnect the speaker cable 1 from the system board.
3. Lift the speaker straight up to remove it 2 from the top cover.
Removing the Speaker Assembly
Reverse the above procedure to install the speaker assembly.
5–40
5.14 Heat Sink
Heat Sink Spare Part Number Information
382412-001
2. Turn the notebook upside down with the front panel
toward you.
5–41
3. Disconnect the fan cable 1 from the system board.
4. Remove the 3 silver PM2.0×4.0 screws 2 that secure the heat
sink to the top cover.
5. Remove the heat sink 3.
Removing the Heat Sink
Reverse the above procedure to install the heat sink.
5–42
5.15 Fan
Fan Spare Part Number Information
382411-001
2. Turn the heat sink upside down with the front panel
toward you.
5–43
3. Remove the 2 silver PM2.0×4.0 screws 1 that secure the fan
to the heat sink.
4. Remove the fan 2.
Removing the Fan
Reverse the above procedure to install the fan.
5–44
5.16 Processor
Processor Spare Part Number Information
373053-001
373052-001
367771-001
380690-001
380033-001
380032-001
5–45
2. Turn the processor locking screw 1 one-quarter turn
counterclockwise until you feel a click.
3. Lift the processor 2 straight up and remove it.
that the gold triangle 3 on the processor should be
✎ Note
aligned in the front right corner when you install the processor.
Removing the Processor
Reverse the above procedure to install a processor.
5–46
5.17 Battery Connector Board
Battery Connector Board Spare Part Number Information
382413-001
2. Turn the top cover top-side up with the front panel
toward you.
5–47
3. Remove the silver PM2.0×4.0 screw that secures the battery
connector board to the top cover.
Removing the Battery Connector Board Screw
5–48
4. Turn the top cover upside down, with the front panel
toward you.
5. Remove the silver PM2.0×4.0 screw 1 that secures the
battery connector board to the top cover.
6. Slide the battery connector board toward the rear panel 2
until it disconnects from the system board.
7. Remove the battery connector board 3.
Removing the Battery Connector Board
Reverse the above procedure to install the the battery connector
board.
5–49
5.18 Power Connector Board
Power Connector Board Spare Part Number Information
382414-001
5–50
power connector board to the top cover.
3. Slide the power connector board toward the rear panel 2 until
it disconnects it from the system board.
4. Remove the power connector board 3.
Removing the Power Connector Board
Reverse the above procedure to install the power connector board.
5–51
5.19 USB/S-Video Controller Board
USB/S-Video Controller Board
382416-001
5–52
USB/S-Video controller board to the top cover.
3. Lift up on the right side of the board 2 to disconnect it from
the system board.
4. Remove the USB/S-Video controller board.
Removing the USB/S-Video Controller Board
Reverse the above procedure to install the USB/S-Video
controller board.
5–53
5.20 Bluetooth Board
Bluetooth Board Spare Part Number Information
Broadcomm Bluetooth board
376651-001
2. Turn the USB/S-Video controller board upside down with the
USB port away from you.
5–54
3. Remove the 2 PM1.5×3.5 screws 1 that secure the
Bluetooth board to the USB/S-Video controller board.
4. Disconnect the Bluetooth board cable 2 from the
USB/S-Video controller board.
5. Remove the Bluetooth board 3.
Removing the Bluetooth Board
Reverse the above procedure to install the Bluetooth board.
5–55
5.21 System Board
System Board Spare Part Number Information
For use on models with full-featured models (includes a disk cell
RTC battery)
381062-001
For use on models with defeatured models (includes a disk cell
RTC battery)
381061-001
✎ All system board spares kits include a disk cell RTC battery.
replacing the system board, ensure that the following
✎ When
components are removed from the defective system board and
installed on the replacement system board:
■ Memory modules (Section 5.6)
■ Mini PCI communications card (Section 5.7)
■ Heat sink (Section 5.14)
■ Processor (Section 5.16)
5–56
1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3) and
remove the following components:
b. Keyboard cover (Section 5.8)
c. Keyboard (Section 5.10)
d. Display assembly (Section 5.11)
e. Base enclosure (Section 5.12)
f. Speaker assembly (Section 5.13)
g. Battery connector board (Section 5.17)
h. Power connector board (Section 5.18)
i. USB/S-Video controller board (Section 5.19)
2. Turn the top cover top-side up, with the front panel
toward you.
5–57
3. Release the ZIF connector 1 to which the TouchPad cable is
connected and disconnect the cable 2 from the system board.
Disconnecting the TouchPad Cable
5–58
4. Turn the top cover upside down with the front toward you.
5 applies only to HP Pavilion ze2000 models. See step 6
✎ Step
in this section for information on removing the system board
screws on Compaq Presario M2000 models.
Removing the System Board Screws, HP ze2000 Models Only
5–59
✎ Step 6 applies only to Compaq Presario M2000 models.
Removing the System Board Screws,
5–60
7. Flex the left edge of the top cover out 1 until the 1394
connector 2 disengages from the top cover.
8. Lift the left side of the system board 3 until the 1394
connector is clear.
9. Flex the front edge of the top cover 4 until the audio
connectors 5 and LED section 6 of the system board
disengage from the top cover.
Releasing the System Board
5–61
10. Slide the system board to the left at an angle and remove it.
Removing the System Board
Reverse the above procedure to install the system board.
5–62
6
Specifications
This chapter provides physical and performance specifications.
Table 6-1
Notebook
Dimensions
HP Pavilion ze2000
Width
Depth
3.01 cm to 3.86 cm
23.46 cm
33.40 cm
1.19 in to 1.52 in
9.24 in
13.15 in
3.29 cm to 3.89 cm
23.06 cm
33.40 cm
1.30 in to 1.53 in
9.08 in
13.15 in
2.44 kg
2.39 kg
5.38 lb
5.26 lb
Width
Depth
Weight (varies by configuration)
HP Pavilion ze2000
Stand-alone power requirements
Operating voltage
Operating current
18.5V dc @ 3.5 A - 65 W
3.5 A
6–1
Specifications
Table 6-1
Notebook (Continued)
Temperature
Operating
Nonoperating
10°C to 35°C
-20°C to 60°C
50°F to 95°F
-4°F to 140°F
Operating
Nonoperating
10% to 90%
5% to 95%, 38.7°C (101.6°F) maximum
wet bulb temperature
Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia)
Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia)
-15 m to 3,048 m
-15 m to 12,192 m
-50 ft to 10,000 ft
-50 ft to 40,000 ft
Shock
Operating
Nonoperating
Random Vibration
Operating
Nonoperating
product safety standards specify thermal limits for plastic
✎ Applicable
surfaces. The notebook operates well within this range of temperatures.
6–2
Specifications
Table 6-2
15.0-inch, XGA, Display
Dimensions
Height
Width
Diagonal
22.9 cm
30.0 cm
38.1 cm
Number of colors
Up to 16.8 million
Contrast ratio
250:1
Brightness
150 nits typical
9.0 in
11.8 in
15.0 in
Pixel resolution
Pitch
Format
Configuration
0.264 × 0.264 mm
1024 × 768
RGB vertical stripe
Backlight
Edge lit
Character display
80 × 25
Total power consumption
5.5 W
Viewing angle
+/-35° horizontal, +15/-35° vertical
typical
6–3
Specifications
Table 6-3
Hard Drives
80-GB*
60-GB*
40-GB*
9.5 mm
70 mm
99 g
9.5 mm
70 mm
102 g
9.5 mm
70 mm
99 g
ATA-5
ATA-5
ATA-5
Synchronous (maximum)
100 MB/sec
100 MB/sec
100 MB/sec
Security
ATA security
ATA security
ATA security
3 ms
13 ms
24 ms
3 ms
13 ms
24 ms
Dimensions
Height
Width
Weight
Interface type
Transfer rate
Seek times (typical read, including setting)
Single track
Average
Maximum
3 ms
13 ms
24 ms
Logical blocks†
156,301,488 117,210,240 78,140,160
Disk rotational speed
4200 rpm
Operating temperature
✎
4200 rpm
4200 rpm
5°C to 55°C (41°F to 131°F)
Certain restrictions and exclusions apply. Consult Customer Care
for details.
*1 GB = 1 billion bytes when referring to hard drive storage capacity. Actual
capacity is less.
†Actual drive specifications may differ slightly.
6–4
Specifications
Table 6-4
Primary 6-cell, Li-Ion Battery Pack
Dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
Weight
2.00 cm
9.40 cm
13.40 cm
0.34 kg
0.79 in
3.70 in
5.28 in
0.75 lb
Energy
Voltage
Amp-hour capacity
Watt-hour capacity
11.1 V
4.4 Ah
48 Wh
Temperature
Operating
Nonoperating
5°C to 45°C
0°C to 60°C
41°F to 113°F
32°F to 140°F
6–5
Specifications
Table 6-5
Applicable disk
Read:
Write:
DVD-R, DVD-RW,
CD-R and CD-RW
DVD-ROM (DVD-5,
DVD-9, DVD-10,
DVD-18),
CD Digital Audio
CD-XA ready (Mode 2,
Form 1 and 2)
CD-I ready (Mode 2,
Form 1 and 2)
CD-R, CD-RW
Photo CD (single and
multisession)
CD-Bridge
1.5 cm (0.59 in)
Disk diameter
Standard disc
Mini disc
6–6
12 cm (4.72 in)
8 cm (3.15 in)
Specifications
Table 6-5
24X DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive (Continued)
Disk thickness
1.2 mm (0.047 in)
Track pitch
0.74 µm
Access time
CD media
DVD media
< 110 ms
< 210 ms
< 130 ms
< 225 ms
Random
Full stroke
Audio output level
Line-out, 0.7 V rms
Cache buffer
2 MB
Data transfer rate
CD-R (24X)
CD-RW (10X)
CD-ROM (24X)
DVD (8X)
16.6 MB/s
Startup time
< 15 seconds
Stop time
< 6 seconds
6–7
Specifications
Table 6-6
Applicable disk
Read:
DVD-R, DVD-RW,
DVD-ROM (DVD-5,
DVD-9, DVD-10,
DVD-18),
CD-ROM (Mode 1
and 2)
CD Digital Audio
CD-XA ready (Mode
2, Form 1 and 2)
CD-I ready (Mode 2,
Form 1 and 2)
CD-R, CD-RW
Photo CD (single
and multisession)
CD-Bridge
1.5 cm (0.59 in)
Write:
CD-R and CD-RW
DVD-R and
DVD-RW
Disk diameter
Standard disc
Mini disc
6–8
12 cm (4.72 in)
8 cm (3.15 in)
Specifications
Table 6-6
8X DVD±RW/R and CD-RW Combo Drive (Continued)
Disk thickness
1.2 mm (0.047 in)
Track pitch
0.74 µm
Access time
CD
DVD
< 175 ms
< 285 ms
< 230 ms
< 335 ms
Random
Full stroke
Audio output level
Audio-out, 0.7 Vrms
Cache buffer
2 MB
Data transfer rate
CD-R (16X)
CD-RW (8X)
CD-ROM (24X)
DVD (8X)
DVD-R (4X)
DVD-RW (2X)
16.6 MB/s
Startup time
< 15 seconds
Stop time
< 6 seconds
6–9
Specifications
Table 6-7
8X DVD-ROM Drive
Applicable disk
DVD-ROM (DVD-5, DVD-9, DVD-10, DVD-18)
CD Digital Audio
CD-R
CD-RW
Photo CD (single and multisession)
CD-Bridge
1.5 cm (0.59 in)
Disk diameter
Standard disc
Mini disc
Disk thickness
6–10
12 cm (4.72 in)
8 cm (3.15 in)
1.2 mm (0.047 in)
Specifications
Table 6-7
8X DVD-ROM Drive (Continued)
Track pitch
0.74 µm
Access time
CD media
DVD media
< 100 ms
< 175 ms
< 125 ms
< 225 ms
Random
Full stroke
Audio output level
Line-out, 0.7 V rms
Cache buffer
512 KB
Data transfer rate
CD-R (24X)
CD-RW (10X)
CD-ROM (24X)
DVD (8X)
16.6 MB/s
Startup time
< 10 seconds
Stop time
< 3 seconds
6–11
Specifications
Table 6-8
24X CD-ROM Drive
Applicable disk
Applicable disc CD-ROM (Mode 1 and 2)
CD Digital Audio
CD-R
CD-RW
Photo CD (single/multisession)
CD-Bridge
1.5 cm (0.59 in)
Disk diameter
Standard disc
Mini disc
12 cm (4.72 in)
8 cm (3.15 in)
Disk thickness
1.2 mm (0.047 in)
Track pitch
1.6 µm
Access time
CD media
DVD media
< 110 ms
< 220 ms
< 125 ms
< 225 ms
Random
Full stroke
Audio output level
Line-out, 0.7 V rms
Cache buffer
128 KB/s
Data transfer rate
CD-R (24X)
16.6 MB/s
Startup time
< 8 seconds
Stop time
< 4 seconds
6–12
Specifications
Table 6-9
System DMA
Hardware DMA
System Function
DMA0
n/a
DMA1*
n/a
DMA2*
n/a
DMA3
n/a
DMA4
Direct memory access controller
DMA5*
Available for PC Card
DMA6
Not assigned
DMA7
Not assigned
*PC Card controller can use DMA 1, 2, or 5.
Table 6-10
System Interrupts
Hardware IRQ
System Function
IRQ0
System timer
IRQ1
Standard 101-/102-Key or Microsoft Natural Keyboard
IRQ2
Cascaded
IRQ3
Intel 82801DB/DBM USB2 Enhanced Host
Controller—24CD
IRQ4
COM1
IRQ5*
Conexant AC—Link Audio
Intel 82801DB/DBM SMBus Controller—24C3
Data Fax Modem with SmartCP
IRQ6
Diskette drive
6–13
Specifications
Table 6-10
System Interrupts (Continued)
IRQ7*
Parallel port
IRQ8
System CMOS/real time clock
IRQ9*
Microsoft ACPI-compliant system
IRQ10*
Intel 82852/82855 GM/GME Graphic Controller
Realtek RTL8139 Family PCI fast Ethernet Controller
IRQ11
Intel USB EHCI controller—24CD
Intel Pro/Wireless 2200BG
TI OHCI 1394 host controller
TI PCI1410 cardbus controller
IRQ12
Synaptics PS/2 touch pad
IRQ13
Numeric data processor
IRQ14
Primary IDE channel
IRQ15
Secondary IDE channel
*Default configuration; audio possible configurations are IRQ5, IRQ7, IRQ9,
IRQ10, or none.
Cards may assert IRQ3, IRQ4, IRQ5, IRQ7, IRQ9, IRQ10, IRQ11, or
✎ PC
IRQ15. Either the infrared or the serial port may assert IRQ3 or IRQ4.
6–14
Specifications
Table 6-11
System I/O Addresses
I/O Address (hex)
000 - 00F
010 - 01F
Unused
020 - 021
022 - 024
Opti chipset configuration registers
025 - 03F
Unused
02E - 02F
87334 “Super I/O” configuration for CPU
040 - 05F
Counter/timer registers
044 - 05F
Unused
060
Keyboard controller
061
Port B
062 - 063
Unused
064
Keyboard controller
065 - 06F
Unused
070 - 071
NMI enable/RTC
072 - 07F
Unused
080 - 08F
DMA page registers
090 - 091
Unused
092
Port A
093 - 09F
Unused
0A0 - 0A1
6–15
Specifications
Table 6-11
I/O Address (hex)
0A2 - 0BF
Unused
0C0 - 0DF
0E0 - 0EF
Unused
0F0 - 0F1
Coprocessor busy clear/reset
0F2 - 0FF
Unused
100 - 16F
Unused
170 - 177
Secondary fixed disk controller
178 - 1EF
Unused
1F0 - 1F7
Primary fixed disk controller
1F8 - 200
Unused
201
Joystick (decoded in ESS1688)
202 - 21F
Unused
220 - 22F
Entertainment audio
230 - 26D
Unused
26E - 26
Unused
278 - 27F
Unused
280 - 2AB
Unused
2A0 - 2A7
Unused
2A8 - 2E7
Unused
2E8 - 2EF
Reserved serial port
6–16
Specifications
Table 6-11
I/O Address (hex)
2F0 - 2F7
Unused
2F8 - 2FF
Infrared port
300 - 31F
Unused
320 - 36F
Unused
370 - 377
Secondary diskette drive controller
378 - 37F
Parallel port (LPT1/default)
380 - 387
Unused
388 - 38B
FM synthesizer—OPL3
38C - 3AF
Unused
3B0 - 3BB
VGA
3BC - 3BF
Reserved (parallel port/no EPP support)
3C0 - 3DF
VGA
3E0 - 3E1
PC Card controller in CPU
3E2 - 3E3
Unused
3E8 - 3EF
Internal modem
3F0 - 3F7
“A” diskette controller
3F8 - 3FF
Serial port (COM1/default)
CF8 - CFB
PCI configuration index register (PCIDIVO-1)
CFC - CFF
PCI configuration data register (PCIDIVO-1)
6–17
Specifications
Table 6-12
System Memory Map
Size
Memory Address
System Function
640 KB
00000000-0009FFFF
Base memory
128 KB
000A0000-000BFFFF
Video memory
48 KB
000C0000-000CBFFF
Video BIOS
160 KB
000C8000-000E7FFF
Unused
64 KB
000E8000-000FFFFF
System BIOS
15 MB
00100000-00FFFFFF
Extended memory
58 MB
01000000-047FFFFF
Super extended memory
58 MB
04800000-07FFFFFF
Unused
2 MB
08000000-080FFFFF
Video memory (direct access)
4 GB
08200000-FFFEFFFF
Unused
64 KB
FFFF0000-FFFFFFFF
System BIOS
6–18
A
Table A-1
Universal Serial Bus
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
+5 VDC
3
Data +
2
Data –
4
Ground
A–1
Table A-2
RJ-45 (Network)
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
Transmit +
5
Unused
2
Transmit –
6
Receive –
3
Receive +
7
Unused
4
Unused
8
Unused
A–2
Table A-3
S-Video-Out
1
2
3
4 56
7
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
S-VHS color (C) signal
5
TV-CD
2
Composite video signal
6
S-VHS intensity ground
3
S-VHS intensity (Y) signal
7
Composite video ground
4
S-VHS color ground
A–3
Table A-4
External Monitor
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
Red analog
9
+5 VDC
2
Green analog
10
Ground
3
Blue analog
11
Monitor detect
4
Not connected
12
DDC 2B data
5
Ground
13
Horizontal sync
6
Ground analog
14
Vertical sync
7
Ground analog
15
DDC 2B clock
8
Ground analog
A–4
Table A-5
RJ-11 (Modem)
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
Unused
4
Unused
2
Tip
5
Unused
3
Ring
6
Unused
A–5
Table A-6
Audio-In (Microphone)
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
Audio signal in
3
Ground
2
Audio signal in
Table A-7
Audio-Out (Headphone)
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
Audio out, left channel
3
Ground
2
Audio out, right channel
A–6
B
3-Conductor Power Cord Set
The wide range input feature of the notebook permits it to operate
from any line voltage from 100 to 120 or 220 to 240 volts AC.
The power cord set included with the notebook meets the
requirements for use in the country where the equipment
is purchased.
Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the
requirements of the country where the notebook is used.
B–1
General Requirements
The requirements listed below are applicable to all countries.
B–2
■
The length of the power cord set must be at least 1.5 m
(5.0 ft) and a maximum of 2.0 m (6.5 ft).
■
All power cord sets must be approved by an acceptable
accredited agency responsible for evaluation in the
country where the power cord set will be used.
■
The power cord sets must have a minimum current capacity
of 10 amps and a nominal voltage rating of 125 or 250 V AC,
as required by each country’s power system.
■
The appliance coupler must meet the mechanical
configuration of an EN 60 320/IEC 320 Standard Sheet C13
connector for mating with the appliance inlet on the back of
the notebook.
Country-Specific Requirements
3-Conductor Power Cord Set Requirements
Country
Accredited Agency
Australia
EANSW
1
Austria
OVE
1
Belgium
CEBC
1
Canada
CSA
2
Denmark
DEMKO
1
Finland
FIMKO
1
France
UTE
1
Germany
VDE
1
Italy
IMQ
1
Japan
METI
3
✎ NOTES:
B–3
3-Conductor Power Cord Set Requirements (Continued)
Country
Accredited Agency
The Netherlands
KEMA
1
Norway
NEMKO
1
Sweden
SEMKO
1
Switzerland
SEV
1
United Kingdom
BSI
1
United States
UL
2
✎ NOTES:
B–4
C
Screw Listing
This appendix provides specification and reference information
for the screws used in the notebook. All screws listed in this
appendix are available in the Miscellaneous Screw Kits, spare
part numbers 382402-001 (for use on HP Pavilion ze2000
models) and 382403-001 (for use on Compaq Presario M2000
models).
C–1
Screw Listing
Table C-1
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Black
5
5.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
1 Two screws that secure the hard drive cover to the notebook (screws
are captured on the cover by C clips; documented in Section 5.3)
2 Two screws that secure the memory module compartment cover to
the notebook (screws are captured on the cover by C clips; documented in
Section 5.6)
3 One screw that secures the Mini PCI compartment cover to the notebook
(screw is captured on the cover by C clips; documented in Section 5.7)
C–2
Screw Listing
Table C-2
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Silver
4
4.0 mm
2.5 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
4 screws that secure the hard drive frame to the hard drive (documented in
Section 5.3)
C–3
Screw Listing
Table C-3
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Black
22
6.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
1 One screw that secures the optical drive to the notebook (documented in
Section 5.5)
2 Seven screws that secure the base enclosure on the HP Pavilion ze2000
C–4
Screw Listing
Table C-3
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Black
22
6.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
1 One screw that secures the keyboard to the notebook (documented in
Section 5.10)
2 Four screws that secure the display assembly on the HP Pavilion ze2000
C–5
Screw Listing
Table C-3
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Black
22
6.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
6 screws that secure the display assembly on the Compaq Presario M2000
C–6
Screw Listing
Table C-3
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Black
22
6.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
Section 5.12)
C–7
Screw Listing
Table C-4
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Black
18
7.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
1 screw that secures the optical drive on the Compaq Presario M2000 notebook
C–8
Screw Listing
Table C-4
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Black
18
7.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
C–9
Screw Listing
Table C-4
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Black
18
7.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
C–10
Screw Listing
Table C-5
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Silver
9
5.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
1 Two screws that secure the keyboard cover to the notebook (documented in
Section 5.10)
2 Six screws that secure the base enclosure on the HP Pavilion ze2000
C–11
Screw Listing
Table C-5
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Silver
9
5.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
1 screw that secures the base enclosure to the notebook (documented in
Section 5.12)
C–12
Screw Listing
Table C-6
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Silver
2
3.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
2 screws that secure the LED board to the notebook (documented in
Section 5.9)
C–13
Screw Listing
Table C-7
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Black
8
4.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
3 screws that secure the keyboard to the notebook (documented in
Section 5.10)
C–14
Screw Listing
Table C-7
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Black
8
4.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
Section 5.12)
C–15
Screw Listing
Table C-7
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Black
8
4.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
C–16
Screw Listing
Table C-8
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Black
5
16.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
5 screws that secure the base enclosure on the HP Pavilion ze2000 notebook
C–17
Screw Listing
Table C-9
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Silver
16
4.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
1 Three screws that secure the heat sink on the HP Pavilion ze2000 notebook
2 One screw that secures the battery connector board to the notebook
3 Two screws that secure the power connector board to the notebook
4 Two screws that secure the USB/S-Video controller board to the notebook
C–18
Screw Listing
Table C-9
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Silver
16
4.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
2 screws that secure the fan to the heat sink (documented in Section 5.15)
C–19
Screw Listing
Table C-9
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Silver
16
4.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
1 screw that secures the battery connector board to notebook (documented in
Section 5.17)
C–20
Screw Listing
Table C-9
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Silver
16
4.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
2 screws that secure the system board on the HP Pavilion ze2000 notebook
C–21
Screw Listing
Table C-9
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Silver
16
4.0 mm
2.0 mm
4.0 mm
Where used:
3 screws that secure the system board on the Compaq Presario M2000
C–22
Screw Listing
Table C-10
Phillips PM1.5×3.5 Screw
mm
Color
Qty.
Length
Thread
Head
Width
Silver
2
3.5 mm
1.5 mm
3.0 mm
Where used:
2 screws that secure the Bluetooth board to the notebook (documented in
Section 5.20)
C–23
Index
1394 port 1–10, 1–12
light 1–10, 1–24
slot 1–10
6-in-1 Memory Reader light
1–12, 1–26
6-in-1 Memory Reader slot
1–12
A
AC adapter, spare part number
3–16, 3–20
arrow keys 1–20, 1–22
audio troubleshooting 2–21
audio-in jack
audio-out jack
B
base enclosure
removal 5–33
3–23, 5–33
battery bay 1–17, 1–18, 1–27,
1–29
battery connector board
removal 5–47
3–23, 5–47
battery light 1–6, 1–8
battery pack
removal 5–6
3–18, 5–6
1–27, 1–29
Bluetooth board
removal 5–54
3–21, 5–54
bottom components 1–27,
1–29
C
cables, service considerations
4–2
caps lock key 1–20, 1–22
caps lock light 1–23, 1–25
Index–1
Index
CD-ROM drive
precautions 4–3
removal 5–11
3–15, 3–22, 5–11
components
bottom 1–27, 1–29
front 1–5, 1–7
keyboard 1–19, 1–21
left-side 1–13, 1–15
rear 1–15, 1–17, 1–18
right-side 1–9, 1–11
top 1–23, 1–25
Computer Setup
Advanced Menu 2–4
Main Menu 2–2
overview 2–1
Security Menu 2–3
Tools Menu 2–4
connector pin assignments
audio-in A–6
audio-out A–6
external monitor A–4
headphone A–6
microphone A–6
modem A–5
monitor A–4
network A–2
RJ-11 A–5
RJ-45 A–2
S-Video-out A–3
A–1
Index–2
connectors, service
D
design overview 1–31
disassembly sequence chart
5–3
diskette drive
precautions 4–3
display assembly
removal 5–28
3–22, 5–28
display hinge brackets, spare
part numbers 3–3, 3–24,
5–28
display release button 1–6, 1–8
display switch 1–23, 1–25
DMA specifications 6–13
docking device,
drives, preventing damage 4–3
DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive
precautions 4–3
removal 5–11
3–15, 3–22, 5–11
DVD±RW/R and CD-RW
Combo Drive
precautions 4–3
removal 5–11
Index
3–15, 3–22, 5–11
DVD-ROM drive
precautions 4–3
removal 5–11
3–15, 3–22, 5–11
E
electrostatic discharge 4–4,
4–8
entertainment cable, spare part
number 3–16, 3–21
exhaust vents 1–17, 1–18,
1–28, 1–30
expansion port 2 1–14, 1–16
external monitor port
F
fan
removal 5–43
3–23, 5–43
features 1–2
feet
illustrated 3–12
locations 5–10
flowcharts, troubleshooting
no audio 2–21, 2–22
no network/modem
connection 2–26
no OS loading 2–15
no OS loading from
diskette drive 2–19
no OS loading from hard
drive 2–16, 2–17, 2–18
no OS loading from optical
drive 2–20
no power 2–8, 2–10, 2–11
no video 2–12, 2–13
2–23
nonfunctioning docking
device 2–14
nonfunctioning keyboard
2–24
nonfunctioning pointing
device 2–25
fn key 1–20, 1–22
front components 1–5, 1–7
function keys 1–20, 1–22
G
grounding equipment and
methods 4–6
H
hard drive
precautions 4–3
removal 5–7
3–15, 3–22, 5–7
hard drive bay 1–28, 1–30
hard drive cover
illustrated 3–12
removal 5–7
Index–3
Index
headphone jack
heat sink
removal 5–41
3–23, 5–41
hinge cover, spare part
numbers 3–3, 3–24, 5–28
I
I/O address specifications
6–15
interrupt specifications 6–13
K
keyboard
removal 5–24
3–18, 3–19, 3–20, 5–24
keyboard components 1–19,
1–21
keyboard cover
removal 5–19
3–23, 5–19
keypad keys 1–20, 1–22
L
label area 1–28, 1–30
LED board
removal 5–22
3–24, 5–22
Index–4
left-side components 1–13,
1–15
Logo Kit, spare part numbers
3–16, 3–23
M
mass storage devices, spare
part numbers 3–14
memory map specifications
6–18
memory module
removal 5–13
3–22, 5–13
1–27, 1–29
cover
illustrated 3–12
removal 5–14
microphone jack
Mini PCI communications
card
removal 5–16
3–20
Mini PCI compartment 1–28,
1–30
illustrated 3–12
removal 5–17
Index
components 3–12
contents 3–13, 3–23
3–13, 3–23
modem jack
modem, troubleshooting 2–26
monitor port 1–14, 1–16
mouse, spare part number
3–16, 3–18
N
network jack
network, troubleshooting 2–26
nonfunctioning device,
troubleshooting 2–14, 2–23
notebook feet
illustrated 3–12
locations 5–10
notebook specifications 6–1
num lock key 1–20, 1–22
O
optical drive
location 1–10, 1–12, 1–28,
1–30
precautions 4–3
removal 5–11
3–15, 3–22
specifications 6–6, 6–8,
6–10, 6–12
P
packing precautions 4–5
PC Card eject buttons 1–14,
1–16
PC Card slots 1–14, 1–16
plastic parts 4–2
pointing device,
power button 1–24, 1–26
power connector 1–14, 1–16
power connector board
removal 5–50
3–23, 5–50
power cord
set requirements B–2
3–20, 3–21
power management features
1–5
power, troubleshooting 2–8
power/standby light 1–6, 1–8
processor
removal 5–45
3–18, 3–20, 3–21, 5–45
R
rear components 1–15, 1–17,
1–18
remote control, spare part
number 3–16, 3–20
Index–5
Index
removal/replacement
preliminaries 4–1
procedures 5–1
right-side components 1–9,
1–11
RJ-11 jack
RJ-45 jack
S
Screw Kit, spare part number
3–16, 3–23
screw listing C–1
security cable slot 1–10, 1–12
serial number 3–1, 5–2
service considerations 4–2
speaker assembly
removal 5–39
3–23, 3–24, 5–39
speakers 1–6, 1–8
specifications
battery pack 6–5
CD-ROM drive 6–12
display 6–3
DMA 6–13
DVD/CD-RW Combo
Drive 6–6
DVD±RW/R and CD-RW
Combo Drive 6–8
DVD-ROM drive 6–10
hard drive 6–4
I/O addresses 6–15
Index–6
interrupts 6–13
memory map 6–18
notebook 6–1
optical drive 6–12
static shielding materials 4–8
S-Video-out jack
system board
removal 5–56
3–21, 5–56
system memory map 6–18
T
tools required 4–1
top components 1–23, 1–25
top cover, spare part numbers
3–7, 3–22, 3–23, 3–24
TouchPad buttons 1–23, 1–25
TouchPad horizontal scroll
region 1–26
TouchPad vertical scroll
region 1–24, 1–26
transporting precautions 4–5
troubleshooting
audio 2–21
Computer Setup 2–1
docking device 2–14
flowcharts 2–5
keyboard 2–24
modem 2–26
network 2–26
2–14, 2–23
Index
OS loading 2–15
overview 2–1
power 2–8
video 2–12
U
port
location 1–10, 1–12, 1–14,
1–16
USB digital drive, spare part
number 3–15
USB travel mouse, spare part
number 3–16, 3–18
removal 5–52
3–24, 5–52
V
video troubleshooting 2–12
volume button 1–24, 1–26
W
1–20, 1–22
Windows logo key 1–20, 1–22
wireless light 1–6, 1–8, 1–26
workstation precautions 4–6
Y
Y-cable, spare part number
3–16, 3–21
Index–7

äcaution - produktinfo.conrad.com

Transcription

Similar documents

Compaq Presario Data Sheet

2nd review.notebook

core x kartos lab

caminalcules answers gr. 7.notebook

HP Pavilion Data Sheet

NORTH LITTLE ROCK SCHOOL DISTRICT SCIENCE FAIR GUIDE

HP Pavilion Data Sheet